OM Radarpilot, Chartpilot Ver.5.0.x

Operating Instructions
RADARPILOT 1100
CHARTRADAR 1100
Software Version 5.0.x
Radar Functions
Aids for Collision Avoidance
VDR Operation
Alarms
Care and Maintenance
Item No.: ED 3051G252 Revision: 00 (2008-07) Order No.: 390005593

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Phone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Fax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
E-mail: shipservice@sam-electronics.de
b_r11_eti.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
Operating Instructions General Safety Precautions
General Safety Precautions
Particular attention must be paid to the notes and warnings refer-

ring to possible faults in the radar display, since such faults can
impair the detection of targets.
The radar can perform its safety function if, and only if, the transmission power and the receiver sensitivity
are adequate. Therefore, these characteristics must be checked regularly (by means of the performance
monitor – see Section 26).
Connected position receivers must fulfil the standard IEC 61162-1 1).
ARPA target data are directly dependent upon the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected speed
sensor and the gyro compass.
Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented

Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) (see Section 1.5).
DANGER: High frequency radiation
Persons must definitely avoid being present in the radiation danger zone
of the rotating antenna.
In the case of work being done on the antenna unit, the antenna switch
situated there must be set to 0 and the transceiver must be discon-
nected from the ship's mains.
☞ There is no international agreement about the danger posed by high frequency radiation of the kind
produced by the radar systems. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m2 is consid-
ered to be dangerous; in some countries, values over 10 W/m2 are regarded as not being completely
safe.
Radius of the Radiation Danger Zone

Transceiver
Antenna Type Radiation Density Radiation Density Radiation Density
A=Up B=Down
100 W/m2 50 W/m2 10 W/m2
5 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 2,8 m 14 m
25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 4,2 m 21 m
25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 3,3 m 16 m
8 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 1,4 m 7m
25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2,6 m 13 m
25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 1,8 m 9m
14 ft S-Band 30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2,6 m 13 m
30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 1,6 m 7.8 m
1) IEC 61162-1 largely corresponds to NMEA 0183.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 3
b_r11_esh.fm / 22.07.09
DANGER: Injury caused by a rotating antenna
When the radar system is switched to "ON", it is possible that, instead

of the expected antenna, a different one will begin to rotate. Therefore, it
must be ensured beforehand that all antennas can rotate freely and that
there are no persons near the antennas.
The different electronic units and gearboxes may be opened only by qualified,
trained persons.
DANGER: Dangerous voltage
Even when the equipment is switched off, there can be a dangerous

voltage present at exposed contacts in the units. Therefore, before a unit
is opened, it must be ensured that the voltage supply to the unit is
disconnected from the ship's mains, and that it remains disconnected.
Because of the capacitors contained in the units, there can be a

dangerous voltage present in any unit even several minutes (or several
hours in the case of monitors) after switching off and disconnection
from the power supply.
☞ If the units are to be disconnected from the ship's mains, it must be remembered that each antenna
unit, each transceiver electronics unit and each indicator normally has its own supply of power from
the ship's mains.
If, for the transfer of signals (e.g. transfer of the heading signal from the compass system), synchro
transmitter are used, a dangerous voltage exists in the units until the reference voltage is switched
off.
4 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_esh.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions List of Contents
List of Contents
General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 RADARPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3 CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4 The Equipment Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.5 The Consistent Common Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.6 Scope of Applicability of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.7 System Structure and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2 Basic Settings; General Remarks about Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 Switching the Radar System On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 General Remarks about the Operating and Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.1 Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.2 Screen Display Fields, Buttons, Menus, Dialogs, Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.3 Input of Numerical Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.4 Input of Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.5 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.6 Printing Out the Screen Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.3 Brilliance and Colour Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4 Colour Distortions, Degaussing and Viewing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4.1 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Cathode Ray Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4.3 Nominal Viewing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.6 An Overview of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.7 The Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.8 The Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.9 Activating/Deactivating of Slave Keyboards/Trackballs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Radar Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3 PPI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.1 Screen Stabilisation: True Motion, Relative Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2 PPI Orientation: Head-Up, North-Up, Course-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3 Centering / Off-Centering of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4 Range Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 5
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
List of Contents Operating Instructions
3.5 Range Rings, Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.6 Own Ship and Target Symbols, Vectors, Past Position Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.7 Trails of Radar Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.8 Setting the Display of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.9 Defining the System Track and the TO-Waypoint; TRACK DATA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.10 Setting the Display of Chart Objects on the RADARPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.11 Setting the Display of Charts and Chart Objects on the CHARTRADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.12 Setting the Display of the Map Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.13 Adjusting the Chart or Map to the Radar Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.14 Setting the Display of the RDF Target Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4 Setting the Radar Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.1 Radar Function On/Off, Interswitch Functions, Master/Slave Switch-Over . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.2 Basic Setting of the Radar Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.3 Selection of the Antenna Revolution Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.4 Radar Setting for High Speed of Own Vessel (HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.5 Suppression of the Synthetics and Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.6 Display of Racon Codes and SART Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5 Heading, Speed, Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.1 Sensor Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.3 Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.4 Position Sensor and Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.5 Sensor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6 Bearing and Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

6.1 Cursor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.2 Variable Range Markers (VRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.3 Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.4 Operating the VRM and the EBL Jointly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.5 Measurement Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.6 Parallel Index Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7.1 Symbols Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.2 Procedure of the Target Acquisition and Tracking Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.3 Manual AIS and ARPA Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.5 Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.6 Target Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
7.7 Additional AIS Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.8 Target IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.9 Reference Target Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.10 Calculation principles for relative / true target data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
7.11 ARPA Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8 General Information about AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

8.1 AIS Summarised Briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.2 Overview of Functions and Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9 AIS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

9.1 Receiving Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.2 Transmitting Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.3 Long-Range Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10 AIS Settings and Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

10.1 Setting the Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.2 Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10.3 Displaying Own AIS Data and AIS State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.4 Reducing the Transmission Power when Loading and Unloading Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.5 Switching Off the Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
11 AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

12.1 Target Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.2 Track Monitoring (Track Alarms and Waypoint Approaching Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
12.3 Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
12.4 Suppressing Certain Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
13 Trial Manoeuvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
13.2 Setting the Trial Manoeuvre in Relative Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13.3 Checking the Trial Manoeuvre in True Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.4 Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
14 Events and Position Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
15 Editing of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
15.2 Modifying an Existing Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
15.3 Generating a New Track on the Basis of an Existing Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
15.4 Managing the Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
16 Editing the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

16.1 Preparing the Editing of the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
16.2 Editing of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
16.3 Editing of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
16.4 Ending the Editing of a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 7
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
17 Displays in the Multidisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

17.1 Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
17.2 Zoom Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
17.3 Depth Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
17.4 Wind Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
17.5 Camera Control (Optional Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
18 Quick Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

18.1 Contents of the Quick Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
18.2 Operating Procedure for the Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
18.3 Setting the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
19 Evaluation of the Radar Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

19.1 Achievable Radar Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
19.2 Distortions of the Radar Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
19.3 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
19.4 Radar Setting for the Display of Racon Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
19.5 Radar Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
19.6 Transmission formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
19.7 Sector Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
19.8 Basics of the Evaluation of Radar Video in SAM RADAR1100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
20 Voyage Data Recorder VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
NAVTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
21 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

21.1 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
21.2 NAVTEX on Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
21.3 Displaying received NAVTEX messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
22 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
23 List of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

23.1 AIS Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23.2 VDR Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
23.3 NAVTEX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
24 List of the Alarm Signal Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
25 Care and Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

25.1 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
25.2 Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
25.3 Remote Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
26 Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
27 System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

27.1 Determining the Versions of Software, Hardware and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
27.2 Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
27.3 Off-Line Self check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
27.4 Checking / Correcting the Computer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
27.5 Distribution and Deletion of Map Data; Data Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
27.6 Exchanging Track Files between the Indicators; Data Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
27.7 The Handling of Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
27.8 Restarting the Radar Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 9
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
10 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11seiv.fm / 22.07.09
General
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 9
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
10 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.1 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals
1 Overview
Subjects of this Section:

◆ Brief overview of the functions and the parts of the system
◆ Optional parts and functions
◆ Consistent Common Reference System
◆ Scope of Applicability of these Operating Instructions
◆ System Structure and Installation
The radar system can be configured in three main versions:

- the basic version, called RADARPILOT 1100
- an expanded version, called CHARTRADAR 1100 which, in addition, offers the possibility to display
selected parts of the electronic chart on the radar screen in an alternative display mode.
- in the maximum version, called MULTIPILOT 1100, which additionally has the properties of an
ECDIS 1).
All versions are approved according to the published radar performance standards.
If the Automatic Identification System UAIS DEBEG 3400 / AIS 3410 is connected, it can then be oper-
ated entirely from the radar indicators.
If a voyage data recorder VDR DEBEG 4300 is connected, a number of important operating steps can
be performed at the radar indicator, where the VDR can also be monitored.
It is possible that Overhead Displays are installed, and that Portable Displays are present, on which
the data of different sensors are grouped together.
1.1 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals
For an up-to-date overview regarding the IHO standards which are currently in effect for ECDIS, ECDIS
application software versions, compliance status and regulatory approvals for CHARTPILOT and its
surrounding equipment, please contact SAM Electronics´ website:
http://www.sam-electronics.de/dateien/navigation/multipil.html
1)
And is also approved as such (together with a CHARTPILOT 1100). The operating procedures of the MULTIPILOT are described in sepa-
rate Operating Instructions.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 11
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
1 Overview RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
1.2 RADARPILOT 1100 Operating Instructions
1.2 RADARPILOT 1100
According to the international convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) chapter V radar equip-
ment is classified into three categories depending of the size of the ship. The RADARPILOT 1100 series
is approved for the highest two categories CAT 1 and CAT 2. The table below provides a summary of
capabilities and differences for both categories as implemented in this radar series.
Category of ship/craft
CAT 2 1) CAT 1 2)
500 gt to <10000gt
Size of ship/craft and All ships/craft ≥10000 gt
HSC < 10000 gt
Minimum operational display area diameter 250 mm 320 mm
Minimum display area 270 mm x 270 mm 340 mm x 340 mm
Usually used monitor 19’’ TFT 23’’ TFT
Auto acquisition of targets Yes Yes
ARPA target capacity 40 40
Activated AIS target capacity 40 40
Sleeping AIS target capacity 400 400
Trial manoeuvre Yes Yes
1)
Earlier classified as 16" radar
2)
Earlier classified as 12" radar
In a RADARPILOT system, the following components can be combined with each other in any desired
manner:
- X-Band or S-Band transceiver and antenna,
- ARPA (radar with Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) display electronics unit,
- Category 1 or Category 2 radar indicators,
- Radar indicators as console versions or desk-top versions.
The scope ranges from single systems to multiple systems consisting of up to five transceivers and five
indicators.
Not only the system configuration but also the manner of use is extremely flexible: with just a few oper-
ating steps, each radar indicator can be switched to act as the master indicator of any desired transceiver
or as a slave for any transceiver that is operating (interswitch function).
☞ On the master indicator, all functions of the radar can be operated, i.e. both on the transmitter side
and on the receiver side. On the slave indicator, most functions on the reception side can be set
independently of the master.
All radar sets are suitable for high speed craft (HSC's) too (if the antenna gearboxes are chosen appro-
priately), and on ships with normal speed they can be operated at twice the antenna rotation rate if this
is required by the situation.
12 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 1.3 CHARTRADAR 1100
1.3 CHARTRADAR 1100
The CHARTRADAR consists of the same components as those of the RADARPILOT, and also has all
the characteristics of the RADARPILOT. In addition, it offers the possibility that the vector charts which
exist in the CHARTPILOT can be displayed on the radar. 1)
The display of raster charts of any kind is not possible on the CHARTRADAR.
The CHARTRADAR function is to be understood as an Add-On to the radar, it does not affect or limit the
radar function in any way.
The electronic charts are vector charts which are provided by a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 via a
Local Area Network (LAN) connection.
A CHARTPILOT is therefore necessary for operation of the CHARTRADARs, but is also used together
with RADARPILOTs. CHARTPILOT and CHARTRADAR or RADARPILOT exchange a large quantity of
data with each other, especially relating to the navigation sensors, the tracks, and the alarms that are
generated by the ECDIS which is contained in the CHARTPILOT.
1.4 The Equipment Components
The radar systems (RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR) consist of two segments which are connected to
one another via bus systems (CAN Bus) and TVA 2) signals. These segments are the radar indicator and
the transceiver/antenna.
The radar indicator 3) is the central operating and display unit. It consists of
- the monitor, with a high-resolution TFT colour screen,
- the trackball, with which all operating inputs can be made,
- the optional radar keyboard, with which operating steps that are frequently used can be carried out
particularly conveniently by means of function keys and rotary knobs,
- the display electronics unit, the heart of which consists of a high-performance computer which also
performs the communication with the display electronics units of the other radar sets installed. In
addition, the interface adaptation for navigation sensors having NMEA interfaces takes place here.
- the diskette drive, contained in the display electronics unit, which permits very easy servicing and
makes it possible to save data and to exchange data with radar systems installed on other ships,
- On the interconnection box, all ship's cables leading to the indicator are connected. If necessary,
special Interface electronics is also accommodated here.
The parts of the radar indicator are usually integrated within a console. However, they can also be
assembled as a desk-top version without integrating the display electronics and the interconnection box.
The display electronics unit is then installed together with the interconnection box to form a single unit.
1) For activation of the CHARTRADAR function on an existing RADARPILOT, a licence code is required.
2)
The TVA signals entered there are the combined reception signals of the radar transceivers. In the indicators, these signals are used to
generate the radar video signal, as well as the trigger signals and antenna signals (TVA = Trigger, Video, Azimuth).
3)
In the appropriate display modes, this indicator has the function of a radar indicator. Where "radar indicator" is mentioned in the documen-
tation, the indicator of the MULTIPILOT too is meant.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 13
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
1.4 The Equipment Components Operating Instructions
In addition,
- slave monitors can be installed, which repeat the display shown by the indicator to which they are
connected.
- slave keyboards or slave trackballs can be installed. Each slave keyboard or slave trackball is
assigned to a slave monitor. For each slave keyboard/trackball, there is a Remote Keyboard Elec-
tronics (RKE) which, by means of a single operating step, makes it possible to assign the operating
functions to a slave keyboard (trackball) / slave monitor pair.
- a video buffer is used, if there is more than one slave monitor connected to an indicator.
The RF components are
- the transceiver (electronics unit), which contains the X-Band transceiver or the S-Band transceiver
(transceiver version B = bulkhead), and
- the antenna (unit), consisting of
- the antenna gearbox (X-Band or S-Band) and
- the scanner (5 ft X-Band or 8 ft X-Band scanner or 14 ft S-Band scanner).
The transceiver can also be accommodated in the antenna gearbox, so that there is no need for a
separate transceiver electronics unit (transceiver version A = antenna/mast ahead).
In addition, a unit called
- the Interswitch may be present. When there are more than two radar indicators or more than two
transceivers installed, the switch-over between the indicators and transceivers is performed by the
Interswitch.
Examples of various equipment configurations are given in the following illustrations. See Figure on page
18.
14 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 1.5 The Consistent Common Reference System
1.5 The Consistent Common Reference System
The radar system with its sensors and connected equipment is implemented in form of a Consistent
Common Reference System (CCRS). Thereby it is possible to have a central function for acquisition,
processing, storage and distribution of data and information, providing identical and obligatory reference
to subsystems within the integrated system. The CCRS is the means to ensure that all parts of the
system use the same source and values for a specific type of system data, for example own ship position,
speed, heading, time, etc. The CCRS allows to define the Consistent Common Reference Point
(CCRP), a reference location in a ship to which all measurements such as own ship position, target range
and bearing, rel. course and speed etc. are referenced. Typically this is the conning position on the
bridge, but may also be the origin of the reference axes of the ship or the radar antenna. The details of
the CCRS and CCRP implementation are documented in the respective chapters of this manual.
target video
Cursor
antenna
sweep (bow) Heading line
COG / SOG CON
EBL
VRM
REF = CON
AIS target
Parallel index line
Measurement relative to the Conning Position (REF = CON)
target video
Cursor COG / SOG
Heading line
antenna sweep
(bow antenna)
EBL
REF = RADAR
VRM
AIS target
Parallel index line
Measurement relative to the Radar antenna (Bow Radar) REF=RADAR
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 15
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
1.6 Scope of Applicability of these Operating Instructions Operating Instructions
1.6 Scope of Applicability of these Operating Instructions
These operating instructions cover all of the above-mentioned variants of the equipment items mentioned.
They refer to systems which are approved under the software version stated on the title page. 1)
The Operating Instructions describe all functions that can be implemented on the RADARPILOT and
CHARTRADAR in the case of the maximum version of the system (without a TRACKPILOT) and the
presence of the sensors that can be connected. In the case of a reduced system configuration and absent
sensors, the functions concerned are not available. The system can also be used without a radar
keyboard, so that only operation by means of the trackball is possible but not the keyboard-based oper-
ating procedure described.
☞ Unless the RADARPILOT or CHARTRADAR is mentioned specifically, all statements made in these
Operating Instructions apply to these types of equipment.
With regard to the VDR DEBEG 4300, only the operating actions that can be performed at the radar indi-
cator are described. The functions of the VDR and further operating possibilities are described in the
Operating Instructions of the VDR.
RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR with Reduced Functionality

A radar indicator 2) can also be configured on service level, so that some or all of the following functions
are not available to the operator:
- The indicator cannot act as a master of the installed radar transceivers, but can be switched on to
the installed transceivers as a slave indicator. If the master indicator of the selected transceiver is
switched off or is going to Stand-By mode, this indicator will be switched to Stand-By. See also
Section 4.1
- The selection and setting of the navigation sensors is not possible. See also Section 5.
- The functions Set/Cancel System Track and Select TO-Waypoint are not available. See also Section
3.9.
- Editing, storing and deletion of pre-planned tracks is not possible. See also Section 15.
1) On page 212, there is a description of how the software version of the radar system can be displayed.
2) This indicator may be installed in a distance to the navigation bridge (i.e. at the chart table, in a control room etc.).
16 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 1.7 System Structure and Installation
1.7 System Structure and Installation
On the following pages drawings of typical radar system installations are shown. The system internal
wiring (interconnection) of the CAN-bus, Ethernet LAN and radar signals (TVA) is shown on a basic level.
For details on a more technical level, refer to the Technical Manuals ED3052G442 and ED3051G542.
Safeguards in Double- and Multiple-Transceiver Installations

In case of failures in the equipment it is always possible to use the system in a "standalone"-manner:
Transceiver failure Electronics unit failure PCI failure
Double Both transceivers can be
The remaining transceiver
installation controlled with the remaining
can be set as slave on the
(IMO-Set), indicator electronics unit; -
second indicator; picture is
see picture both radar pictures can be
visible at both indicators.
next page observed separately.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 17
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
1.7 System Structure and Installation Operating Instructions
X-Band antenna unit

with 5 ft scanner and
transceiver
CAT 2
TVA CAN Bus radar indicator
Desk-top version
Display
Navigation electronics unit
sensors
AIS Interconnection box
Example of a single installation with minimum scope
S-Band antenna unit with 14 ft scanner and transceiver

X-Band antenna unit
with 8 ft scanner
Transceiver
electronics unit
CAN Bus
CAT 1 CAT 1
radar indicator radar indicator
Display Display
Navigation electronics unit electronics unit
sensors X-Band TVA Redundant /
TVA Interconnection box TVA additional
Alarm system Interconnection box navigation sensors
S-Band TVA
AIS AIS
A typical dual installation (IMO set)
18 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 2 Basic Settings; General Remarks about Operating
Operating Instructions 2.1 Switching the Radar System On and Off
2 Basic Settings; General Remarks about Operating

◆ Switching the radar system on and off
◆ General remarks about the operating and display elements
◆ The trackball and its keys
◆ General remarks about menus
◆ The input of numerical values and text
◆ Brilliance and colour settings
◆ Display modes
◆ Overview of the screen
◆ The menu structure
◆ Functions of the keys and rotary knobs on the optional radar keyboard
2.1 Switching the Radar System On and Off
Switching the radar system ON is done by means of the ON/OFF switch or POWER
keys situated on one of the monitors of the radar indicators. When this is done, all radar
indicators and transceivers are switched on. 1)
After the warm-up phase of the magnetron - 3 minutes for X-Band and 3.5 minutes for S-Band - stand-
by operation is achieved and the radar function can be switched on; see page 67.
☞ The act of switching an indicator on never causes a transceiver to be switched directly into radar
operation mode.
☞ If an attempt to switch over to radar operation occurs before stand-by operation is achieved, the indi-
cation WARM UP appears instead of the list of transceivers.
Switching the radar system OFF: Switch off all radar indicators by means of the ON/OFF switch 2). As
long as there is one of the switches in the ON state, all electronics units of the indicators and transceivers
remain switched on. 3)
Stand-By Operation
The main difference between stand-by operation and radar operation is that, during stand-by operation,
the transceiver is not transmitting and the antenna is not rotating. Therefore, the radar video is absent on
the PPI, and none of the functions that depend on the transceiver can be operated yet.
During stand-by operation, the magnetron is kept at its operational temperature.
1) If a display electronics unit is exposed to very low temperatures (around -15°C or less), it can happen that its computer does not start up.
The screen of the associated monitor then remains dark, or becomes dark after a short time. In this case, the radar system must remain
switched on for about 30 minutes (in spite of the dark screen) so that the display electronics units will warm up. If the radar system is then
switched off and is switched on again after a waiting time of a few seconds, the computer will start up in the normal way.
2)
If an indicator has a POWER key, that indicator is switched off by prolonged pressing of this key (typically at TFT monitors).
3) Even when the radar system is completely switched off, the AIS electronics unit continues to operate. It continues to transmit in accordance
with the settings that were made last, but using its internal back-up GPS receiver. Therefore it is not recommended to switch the radar
system completely off, when the entire set of navigational data shall be available for AIS.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 19
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2 Basic Settings; General Remarks about Operating RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
2.2 General Remarks about the Operating and Display Elements Operating Instructions
2.2 General Remarks about the Operating and Display Elements
On the indicators of the radar system, many screen display fields also act as buttons or input fields which
can be operated quickly and intuitively by means of the trackball and cursor.
With these few elements, the entire radar system can be operated from the radar indicator with the aid
of its trackball. In addition, the optional radar keyboard contains function keys and rotary knobs for direct
access to some functions that are needed frequently.
2.2.1 Trackball and Cursor
☞ If you are already familiar with graphic man-machine inter-

MORE key...
faces, you might be able to skip this section. Before doing so,
for left-handed for right-handed
you should have a look at the picture of the trackball beside people people
this text.
Every operating step begins with the operator moving the cursor
by means of the trackball to a particular place on the screen (to a DO key
text item, a numerical value, a symbol or any desired place on the
PPI). The next step is always the pressing of one of the trackball
keys. In the following, this brief pressing of the key is called
clicking. What then happens depends on the key used, the
element on which clicking took place, and the operating situation,
and is the subject of these operating instructions.
The cursor has a resting position to which it goes 30 seconds
after the last operating process. This position is situated beside the PPI, below the ACQ TGT button.
If the cursor cannot be found, it is not necessary to wait for the 30 seconds until it has returned to the
resting position: if a MORE key is pressed and is kept pressed, and the DO key is then pressed three
times, the cursor returns to the resting position immediately.
☞ If first the DO key and then the MORE key is pressed, that works too. However, with that sequence
there is a greater probability of unintentionally triggering a function or performing a switch-over
(because the cursor is situated over a corresponding button).
If the cursor is situated outside the PPI, it is shaped like a hand or an arrow. Inside the PPI, it is a set of
crosswires.
The trackball has three keys with two different functions:
DO Key
The most important key is the middle (bigger) one. The most displayed elements react to this key, which
performs the functions that are needed the most frequently. In these operating instructions, it is called the
"DO key". In the following, "clicking" always means clicking with the DO key unless stated otherwise.
MORE Keys
The two keys situated above the DO key are called "MORE keys" in these operating instructions. They
have identical functions 1) which are not needed as frequently. Not all elements which can be operated by
means of the DO key react to the MORE key also. Furthermore, by pressing of the MORE key, open
menus (for menus, see below) can generally be closed without any results, and inputs can be aborted.
1) There are two "MORE" keys so that both left-handed people and right-handed people can operate them ergonomically. Their functions are
identical.
20 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.2 General Remarks about the Operating and Display Elements
2.2.2 Screen Display Fields, Buttons, Menus, Dialogs, Lists
Some screen display fields are used only to display numerical values, names or stati, but cannot be oper-
ated.
In the case of most screen display fields, the operating procedure for the functions displayed there is like-
wise performed by clicking on the display field. In the following, these display fields which can be oper-
ated are also called "buttons".
Coloured Buttons
Coloured buttons indicate the activated state. In the case of functions which only have an "on" (or "true")
state and an "off" (or "untrue") state, the "on" (or "true") state is indicated by a coloured background.
Examples:
- IR on a grey background means that interference rejection is not switched on; IR on a coloured back-
ground means that it is switched on.
- VIDEO OFF on a grey background means that the radar video is not switched off; VIDEO OFF on
a coloured background means that it is switched off.
Buttons that are flashing in colour signify that the corresponding function (e.g. ACQ TGT, A D J U S T
etc.) can be executed.
Sensitive and Insensitive Buttons and Display Fields

Buttons and other display fields that can be operated can be insensitive in particular operational states,
i.e. they cannot be operated. For example, after clicking on the TUNE field, tuning can be performed on
the master indicator, but not on a unit switched to act as a slave indicator. On the slave indicator, the
TUNE field is displayed as being insensitive.
☞ Insensitive display fields and buttons can be recognised from their low-contrast lettering or colouring.
Identification of the Screen Display Fields which can be Operated

Before pressing of the DO or MORE key, display fields and buttons which can be operated can be recog-
nised from the black border which indicates the boundary of the sensitive display field or button as soon
as the cursor is situated in this region. Furthermore, the shape of the cursor changes to that of a hand.
Operating Procedure for the Context Menus

Particular displayed elements react to clicking by presenting a list of further possibilities - the "context
menu", as it is called. If clicking takes place on one of the buttons contained in the context menu, the
corresponding change in the function takes place and the context menu disappears.
After a function has been changed, the context menu can be closed by clicking on it with the MORE key
or by clicking into the background area (with DO).
☞ Latest 30 seconds after the last operating process, the context menu switches off automatically.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 21
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Procedure for the Menus 1.DO off:

MENU DO
The buttons MENU to BRILL situated at bottom right open or
DO
menus in which, in contrast to the context menus, several
MENU
settings can be made before the menu is closed. 2.DO
Switching the menu off: Click on the title of the menu. DISPLAY SETTINGS...
UTILITIES...
☞ 30 seconds after the last operating process on the menu,
it switches itself off automatically. off: DO
Buttons situated there whose names end with ... open in the back: DO MENU
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Multidisplay either a Dialog (see below) or a submenu, which
covers the menu that is already open. In the header of the HELP OWN SHIP
submenu, there is the title of the submenu, and above that the TARGET ID STERN LINE
title of the higher-order menu.
Returning to the higher-order menu: Click on the title of the submenu.
☞ The complete structure of the menu system is shown in Section 2.7.
Dialogs
In menus, only displays are switched on and off, and Dialogs 1.DO
MENU
are switched on. Menus are only intended for short operations.
Dialogs, on the other hand, are intended for operations which
take more time and for permanent indication. There, settings 2.DO
MENU
and the more complex operating procedures can be performed. AIS...
Most Dialogs appear in the Multidisplay. They cover one 3.DO

another, but are not automatically switched off 1). With the AIS SETTINGS...
hidden OTHER button, they can be brought to the surface at
any time.
4.DO
AIS SETTINGS
In some cases, Dialogs concerning a particular subject are AIS CONTROL
or
combined. The change-over between such dialogs is described TRANSMITTER ON
here by the example of the AIS SETTINGS Dialog (which is
LONG RANGE INTERROGATION
opened by first clicking on the MENU button and then clicking
on the AIS... button in the AIS menu): 5.DO
AIS CONTROL
CHANNELAISMANAGEMENT
SETTINGS
Switching over to another AIS SETTINGS Dialog: AIS CONTROL
- Click on the title (here AIS CONTROL). In the context TRANSMITTER ON
menu which then appears, click on the desired Dialog LONG RANGE INTERROGATION
title, OR
- use the MORE button to change the Dialog AIS SETTINGS
CHANNEL MANAGEMENT
☞ If a MORE button is available in a Dialog, this means that DATA SET USED
there are one or more additional Dialogs available for the
selected function.
MORE CLOSE
MORE changes to the other AIS SETTINGS Dialogs

DO closes the AIS SETTINGS Dialog
1)
They are switched off with the CLOSE button of the Dialog concerned. This is necessary only if so many dialogs and displays are open
that the context menu of the hidden OTHER button is not clear enough.
22 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
The Hidden OTHER Button

To switch over the content of entire areas of the screen, e.g. the area containing the Multidisplay or the
target data, the OTHER button is used; this button is not continuously visible.
The OTHER button appears in miniaturised form in the top left-hand corner of the display as soon as the
cursor is situated in the relevant display. It appears in normal form as soon as the cursor is situated in
the area of the normal display of the OTHER button. By clicking of this button, a context menu with the
possible display-selections opens up.
OTHER OTHER
Area to be ZOOM
NEW
switched over DO
TRIAL MANOEUVRE
BUOY, LATER
TRACK SYSTEM
STARBOARD
EDIT MAP
Operating Procedure for the Lists

Lists are dialogs which are used for selection and display of the
elements contained in them. Marking of a list element is done by Scroll bar
clicking.
Load Track(s)
If the list contains more entries than can be simultaneously /ATLANTIC
No. Name
displayed, it can be scrolled by clicking below or above the scroll DO
1301 HELSINKI-BRIXHAM
bar. Alternatively, click on the scroll bar and scroll with the track-
1302 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 1
ball. Some lists have additional buttons for scrolling: 1303 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 3
and for line-by-line scrolling, and for page-by- 1304 BRIXHAM-FREEPORT
page scrolling. 1305 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 2
Some lists indicate the files which are contained in a catalog. For
1307 FREEPORT-MIAMI
example, the list shown here indicates the files of tracks which 1308 FREEPORT-MIAMI 1
are contained in the catalog ATLANTIC. Other catalogs too can
exist. By clicking on the button, the higher level is
displayed, i.e. in this example the list of the catalogs.
☞ Some lists also have a search function: If you click into the input field (at the top of the list), the
virtual keyboard which then opens up enables you to enter the number or the beginning of the name
of the list entry that is being searched for. If you click on Enter, the list jumps to the entry that is
being searched for.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 23
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.2.3 Input of Numerical Values
In some display fields, numerical values can be entered. This is done with the aid of a virtual keyboard
which appears on the screen as soon as clicking is performed on such input field. With the MORE key,
the input can be aborted without any change occurring.
It is possible to choose between the input of a new value and the changing of the existing value. An
exception to this rule is the input of geographical coordinates, for which different algorithms are appli-
cable.
Entering of a New Value 1.DO
1. Click on the numerical input field; a virtual keyboard is opened. HDG 087.5
2. Click numerals one after another. They appear in the display
area of the keyboard. 087.5
Input 1 2 3
☞ Before the decimal places, click on the point button, 2.DO 4 5 6
unless the point is entered automatically. 7 8 9 Take-over:
3.DO
☞
0 . OK
Signs, e.g. for the time zone, can be entered with the
button + .
☞ With the button , the character situated on the right in
the display area can be deleted.
3. By clicking on the OK button, the value displayed is taken over and the keyboard disappears.
Changing of an Existing Value

1. Click on the numerical input field; a virtual keyboard is opened.
1 2 3
2. With the first pressing of the or button, the value which 4 5 6
DO
Increasing
exists at that time appears in the display area of the keyboard. 7 8 9
DO
Decreasing
+ 0 . OK the value
As long as the button of the virtual keyboard is kept
pressed (with the DO key), the existing value increases. As long
as the button is kept pressed, it decreases.
3. With the OK button, the keyboard is made to disappear and the
value entered is taken over.
Input of Geographical Coordinates

1. Click on the numerical input field; a virtual keyboard is 008:36.437 W
1 2 3
opened.
4 5 6 E
Here, the existing value appears on the display area of the 7 8 9 W
keyboard. Instead of the and buttons, the keyboard : 0 . OK
has the buttons needed for the input of the relevant hemi-
sphere.
2. By the input of numerals, the existing value is overwritten, beginning at the most significant figure.
3. With the point button, you go from the "degrees" part to the "minutes" part, from there to the "thou-
sandths of a minute" part, and from there to the W/E, N/S input part.
4. By clicking on the OK button, the value displayed is taken over and the keyboard disappears.
24 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.2.4 Input of Texts
In some fields, a text line consisting of large and small

letters, numerals and punctuation marks can be entered. ‘ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – =
Tab q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
The process corresponds to new input of numbers - see Caps a s d f g h j k l ; ’ Enter
above. DO
Shift z x c v b n m , . / Space
The virtual keyboard which appears after the clicking of

these fields is similar to the usual (English) computer
keyboard:
- With the Caps button, a switch-over between large and
small letters takes place. ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
- With the Shift button, all characters are switched over. Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
Caps A S D F G H J K L : " Enter
- With the button, the character situated on the right DO
Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? Space
in the display field is deleted.
- The input is completed by clicking on the Enter button.
2.2.5 Help Function
As soon as the cursor is situated on a field that can be oper-

2.DO
ated, the function of the DO key and (if applicable) the function MENU
of the MORE key are displayed in the Quick Info box at the DISPLAY SETTINGS
3.DO
bottom of the picture if the help function is switched on. HELP OWN SHIP
Switching the Help Function On and Off

Click on the MENU button, and then, in the DISPLAY SETTINGS menu, click the HELP button.
2.2.6 Printing Out the Screen Content
If there is a printer connected (via a connected CHARTPILOT), the image on the screen can be printed
out:
Click on the EVENT button or press the EVENT key, and then click 1.DO
or
EVENT
on the PRINT SCREEN button. EVENT
☞ The EVENT button remains coloured until the print job has been
given to the CHARTPILOT. Page 135 DROP EVENT
2.DO PRINT SCREEN
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 25
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.3 Brilliance and Colour Selection Operating Instructions
2.3 Brilliance and Colour Selection
For the approximate but usually adequate adaptation of the screen brilliance to suit the brightness of the
surroundings, there is a choice between 6 colour palettes.
Fine adjustment of the overall brilliance is possible. Furthermore, the brilliance of the PPI element groups
can be adjusted individually.
The availability and function of the brilliance controls and settings depends on the display mode and
installed monitor type.
If there are slave monitors connected, all settings except for the fine adjustment of the monitor brightness
and contrast act on the master indicator and on the slave monitors, regardless of whether the settings
are performed on the master indicator or on the slave keyboard.
Setting the Brilliance by Selection of Colour Palettes

BRILLIANCE
Click on the BRILL button or press the BRILL key.
- By clicking on the DAY button, the medium daytime colour GREY MODE
palette NORMAL DAY is switched on. 1) DEGAUSS AUTO MAN
- By clicking on the NIGHT button, the medium night-time
BRIGHTNESS
colour palette NORMAL NIGHT is switched on.
- To switch on the other daylight colour palettes, click on the CONTRAST
DAY button with the MORE key and select the desired PANEL
palette.
DAY NIGHT
- To switch on the other night-time colour palettes, click on
the NIGHT button with the MORE key and select the SETTINGS...
palette.
2.DO
Central Dimming
The selection of the colour palettes described above can also be performed together with other indicators
of the system (central dimming). At service level, the following definition is possible in this regard:
A: The radar indicator does not participate in the central dimming.
B: The radar indicator always participates in the central dimming. Any change to a different colour
palette performed at one of the participating indicators has an effect on all participating indicators.
C: The operator decides whether the indicator participates in the central dimming.
In such a case, the button is provided next to the NIGHT button (button DO
NIGHT
green = indicator participates in central dimming).
When the function is activated, no change takes place yet. Only when a colour palette is selected at
one of the participating indicators (and the function is active) is this colour palette used by all partic-
ipating indicators.
Displaying Areas of the Electronic Chart in Grey Shades (on the CHARTRADAR only)
On the CHARTRADAR, the BRILLIANCE menu in the Chart
BRILLIANCE
mode additionally contains the GREY MODE button. If this func- DO
tion is switched on, the areas of the electronic chart are GREY MODE
displayed not in colour but in grey shades. In this type of display,
the coloured radar video and symbols are visually easier to distinguish from the background.
1) All colour information in these operating instructions refers to the average colour palette for daytime, namely NORMAL DAY.
26 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.3 Brilliance and Colour Selection
How to Brighten a Very Dark Screen

If the screen is set very dark in a very bright environment, it might no longer be possible to recognise
anything on the screen. Thus, the brilliance can no longer be increased in the manner described. A way
out of this "trap" is offered by a brilliance increase with the DO and MORE keys:
Press a MORE key, then the DO key, and keep both keys pressed; with the second MORE key, make
the screen brighter step by step.
☞ If first the DO key and then both MORE keys are pressed, that works too. However, with that
sequence there is a greater probability of unintentionally triggering a function or performing a switch-
over (because the cursor is situated over a corresponding button).
Fine Adjustment of the Monitor Brightness and Contrast

For this purpose, the BRILLIANCE menu has two concentric squares as a setting aid.
The brightness and contrast should be set in such a way that the outer square is deep
black and the inner square stands out only slightly from the outer square. These adjust-
ments are performed by means of the brightness and contrast knobs of the monitor. 1)
On monitors which do not have these knobs, the adjustments are performed as follows:
1. Click on the BRILL button or press the BRILL key. 2.DO
3.
2. Click on the BRIGHTNESS field or on the CONTRAST field. 1) CONTRAST 90%
3. Perform the desired adjustment with the trackball. 4.DO
☞ For TFT monitors following settings are recommended:

For day colour palettes BRIGHTNESS 50 to 90%, CONTRAST 100 to 70%.
For night colour palettes BRIGHTNESS 80 to 100%, CONTRAST 50 to 10%.
4. Press the DO key.
☞ If there are slave monitors connected, only the brightness and contrast of the indicator being oper-
ated are set in this way. As soon as another keyboard is activated (see page 38), the monitor situ-
ated there is likewise set to these values.
Setting the Brilliance of Individual Elements

1. Click on the BRILL button or press the BRILL key.
2.DO BRILLIANCE
2. Click on the SETTINGS button. SETTINGS
3. Now, by means of the procedures already described, the 3.DO LAMPS

DATA
following items can be set:
- After clicking on the LAMPS field: the brilliance of the
lamps on the keyboard. SCALE
- After clicking on the DATA field: the brilliance of the VIDEO
whole area outside the PPI. SYMBOLS
- After clicking on the SCALE field: the brilliance of the MARKER
compass scale. MAP / CHART
- After clicking on the VIDEO field: the brilliance of the
radar video and the trails.
- After clicking on the SYMBOLS field: the brilliance of If there is no CHARTPILOT installed
the target synthetics and of the own ship symbol. this field is labelled MAP
- After clicking on the MARKER field: the brilliance of the cursor, heading line, stern line, EBL's,
VRM's, range rings and the System Track.
1) Monitors are also used, which only have a brightness control and no contrast control (and vice versa).
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 27
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.4 Colour Distortions, Degaussing and Viewing Distance Operating Instructions
- After clicking on the MAP / CHART (or MAP) field: the brilliance of the map (or chart), tracks
and guard zones.
☞ These settings act only on the colour palette that is currently selected, and they remain stored for
that colour palette. If necessary, the settings must be repeated for the other colour palettes.
Setting the Illumination of the Optional Keyboard 2.DO 3.
PANEL 90%
Setting is performed in the BRILLIANCE menu by means of the
4.DO
PANEL field. During this process, the procedure already described
should be used.
Colours on Slave Monitors

If, as the slave monitor, a monitor type is used which is different from the monitor type in the radar indi-
cator, it can happen that the display of colours is different on the slave monitors.
WARNING:
As a result of this it is possible that, on such slave monitors, not all
chart objects are clearly identifiable.
2.4 Colour Distortions, Degaussing and Viewing Distance
2.4.1 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Cathode Ray Tubes
As a result of changes in the magnetic field at the location of the monitor, the shadow mask of the
cathode ray tube might become magnetised, which leads to discolouration over the entire screen or in
parts of the display. Because, in the earth's magnetic field, the ship itself acts as a magnet, such changes
in the magnetic field can also be caused by changes in the ship's course. The demagnetisation which
then has to be performed on the shadow mask (degaussing) can be performed automatically and - if
necessary - manually.
☞ If this does not lead to success, the trouble might also be due to magnetic components or magnet-
ised housings, which must then be removed from the environment of the monitor or degaussed.
Manual Degaussing DO
Manual degaussing is performed by pressing of the DEGAUSS BRILLIANCE

key on the monitor. On monitors which do not have this key, a DEGAUSS AUTO MAN
corresponding button is active:
Click on the BRILL button or press the BRILL key and then click on the MAN button.
Automatic Degaussing
With particular types of monitor, it also possible to set automatic AUTO
degaussing. When the autodegauss function is switched on,
DO
degaussing takes place at adjustable intervals of time, and also
when the course has been changed by a predefined amount DEGAUSS AUTO MAN
after the last degauss.
Switching the Autodegauss Function On and Off

Click on the BRILL button and then on the AUTO button.
28 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.4 Colour Distortions, Degaussing and Viewing Distance
Setting the Autodegauss Function 1.MORE
1. Click on the BRILL button or press the BRILL key, and then
click on the AUTO button with the MORE key. DEGAUSS AUTO MAN
TIME 2.DO
2. Click on the TIME button with the MORE key; then, in the TURNING
Dialog that is opened as a result, either
a) click on the desired time interval, or
DO
AUTO TIME
b) click into the (vertical) bar-area, drag the bar to the 2.c 10 min
desired value, and press the DO key, or 180 min
c) click into the upper numerical field and enter the value DO
120 min
with the virtual keyboard. 2.a 60 min
30 min
3. Click on the TURNING field with the MORE key; then, in the 20 min
same way, input the course change for which automatic DO 10 min
2.b
OFF
degaussing is to take place.
2.4.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)
If the display on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then replaced
by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case of cathode ray
tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of TFT monitors,
in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore cannot be regarded
as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with a different display, the
discoloration disappears.
2.4.3 Nominal Viewing Distance
Different font heights are used on the different miscelleneous windows on the screen. (Temporary info-
text excluded).
Based on the smallest font used on the screen,
- for the 19’’ (48,3 cm, CAT2 Radar with 250 mm diameter of PPI) TFT a nominal viewing distance of
1,00 m
- for the 23’’ (58,4 cm, CAT1 Radar with 320 mm diameter of PPI) TFT a nominal viewing distance of
1,43 m
is recommended.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 29
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.5 Display Modes Operating Instructions
2.5 Display Modes
If there is a CHARTPILOT connected, it is possible to choose between the following display modes:
Radar mode: PPI with all radar, ARPA and AIS functions. The map edited on the radar as per Section
16 can be displayed - see Section 3.12.
Chart mode: PPI with all radar, ARPA and AIS functions. Instead of the map, the User Chart Objects
can be displayed on the RADARPILOT, and on the CHARTRADAR it is also possible to display the
chart transferred from a connected CHARTPILOT - see Section 3.10 and Section 3.11.
Switch-Over of the Display Modes

MENU
Switch-over is performed by means of the keys or 1.DO
RADAR MODE and CHART MODE. The lamp
above the keys indicates the display mode that is
RADAR CHART MENU
currently switched on.
DISPLAY SETTINGS...
Alternatively, switch-over can be performed by MODE
UTILITIES...
means of buttons: on the display, click on the ALARMS...
MENU button, and then click on the desired mode
button.
AIS...
VDR...
RADAR CHART
MODE
RADAR CHART
2.DO
30 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.6 An Overview of the Screen
2.6 An Overview of the Screen
Radar Mode
The following illustration provides an overview of the arrangement of display elements and operating
elements on the screen in the Radar mode.
Transceiver settings: Acquiring targets (p. 95) Radar PPI:

stand-by/radar operation (p. 68) deleting targets (p. 100) range selection (p. 44)
master/slave (p. 68) centering/off-centering (p. 44)
transceiver selection (p. 68) suppression of the video or synthetics (p. 73)
Alarm symbol for calling up
radar video setting (p. 69) the existing warnings (p. 181)
antenna revolution rate (p. 73)
Compass course (p. 76)
speed (longitudinal direction) (p. 76)
PPI orientation (p. 43)
PPI movement (p. 41)
Position display:
data of position sensor (p. 79):
own ship, course and speed
over ground
or
cursor position (p. 85),
Multidisplay:
Selectable display of dialogs
and graphics:
Alarm list (p. 183),
Alarm settings (p. 125
Navigation sensor data (p. 76,
79),
AIS data and settings (p. 91)
Trial manoeuvre (p. 129),
Zoom display (p. 151),
Depth display (p. 152),
Wind display (p. 153),
Docking display (p. 150),
EDIT TRACK Dialog (p. 138),
EDIT MAP Dialog (p. 145),
Track lists/catalogs (p. 52)
Target data (p. 101 )

System Track data (p. 55)
waypoint data (p. 55
Switching on/off the display of Brilliance setting (p. 26)

sleeping AIS targets (p. 95) Degaussing (p. 28)
Menus for further
Quick Info box (p. 155) functions (p. 34) Setting
Measurement aids: with further information: - display of the tracks (p. 52)
Parallel index lines (p. 89) ETA to cursor position - System Track (p. 54)
VRM (p. 85) date, time, stop watch, - To-Waypoint (p. 56)
EBL (p. 86) help function editing tracks (p. 137)
Setting of MAP button:
Path Prediction (p. 50) Setting display
trails (p. 51) Setting of event markers (p. 135) - of the map (p. 64)
vectors (p. 48) printing the screen contents (p. 25) - of the AIS Aids-to-Navigation (p. 64)
past plots (p. 49) editing maps (p. 145)
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 31
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.6 An Overview of the Screen Operating Instructions
Chart Mode
In Chart mode, an electronic chart can be displayed. The arrangement of display elements and operating
elements on the screen in Chart mode is identical to the arrangement in Radar mode (for the only excep-
tion, see illustration).
"Chart button in the corner area" In Chart mode, the MAP button of the Radar mode
for direct access to most important is replaced by the CHART button:
chart settings (p 59 ff) Setting display
- of the User Chart Objects (p. 57 or 58),
of the AIS Aids-to-Navigation (p. 64),
Additionally: - of the chart (p. 58),
- deleting of event markers (p. 135)
- setting limits for the anchor watch
function (p 225
The MORE Context Menus in the PPI

If you click into the PPI with MORE, a context
Page 88 SET LINE 1
menu appears which contains at least the buttons
SET LINE 2
SET LINE 1, SET LINE 2 and OFF CENTER. If an Page 44 OFF CENTER
object is clicked for which special functions exist Page 95 ACQUIRE TARGET
(e.g. targets or own ship's position), the context
menu contains additional specific buttons (these Buttons depending on
are explained at the appropriate place in these the clicked objects
Operating Instructions); otherwise, the button
ACQUIRE TARGET (ARPA).
32 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.6 An Overview of the Screen
Synthetics and their Context Sensitive Functions in the PPI
AIS target: symbol settings (p. 46) ARPA target: symbol settings (p. 46)
DO: displaying target data (p. 101) DO: displaying target data (p. 101)
DO, ACQ TGT flashing: deleting several or all targets (p. 101) DO, ACQ TGT flashing: deleting several or all
MORE: (context menu see page 100) targets (p. 100)
deleting target (p. 100) MORE: (context menu see page 100)
displaying additional target data (p. 103) deleting target (p. 100)
sending safety message (p. 113) displaying target ID (p. 106)
displaying target ID (p. 106) selecting reference target (ARPA only, p 107)
selecting reference target (p 107) fixing the zoom display on a target (p. 151)
fixing the zoom display on a target (p. 151)
Heading line
Sleeping (AIS) target (p. 48)
display on/off (p. 95)
DO: displaying AIS target data (p. 106) Zoom frame (p. 151)
DO, ACQ TGT flashing: Manual target acqui- DO: positioning the zoom frame
sition (p. 95) MORE: (context menu see page 151)
MORE: (context menu see page 95) Fixed ARPA fixing the frame
displaying data (p. 105) target switching the zoom display off
sending safety message (p. 113)
manual target acquisition (p. 95) Target video (p. 95)
DO, ACQ TGT flashing: Manual target
acquisition
MORE: (context menu see page 95)
Manual target acquisition
Pre-planned track
setting the display (p. 52)
defining System Track (p. 54)
editing tracks (p. 137)
2.38NM
267.8° Measurement line
MORE: (context menu see page 32)
setting and deleting the line (p 88)
In addition: Electronic charts
(Chart mode only) Parallel index line (p. 89)
settings see page 58 DO setting the distance and bearing
Range rings, grid (p. 45)
Acquisition/guard zone (p. 125)

DO: setting angle
setting range
VRM (p. 85), EBL (p. 86)
DO: setting the distance and bearing
moving the origin of EBL
setting distance and bearing jointly
1342 (p. 88)
dG
Own ship symbol settings (p. 46)
Event marker MORE: (context menu see p. 48)
(p. 135) centering/off-centering (p. 44)
displaying own AIS data (p. 121)
Position fix (p. 135) setting own AIS data (p. 117)
switching own ship symbol on/off (p 48)
User Chart Objects (p. 57/58)
(not in Radar mode) (AIS) base station (p. 123)
DO: displaying data
Map objects (p. 64) (Radar mode only) MORE: (context menu see p. 123)
editing the map (p. 145) displaying data (p. 123) AIS Aids-to-Navigation (p. 123)
sending safety message (p. 113) DO: displaying data
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 33
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.7 The Menu Structure Operating Instructions
2.7 The Menu Structure
The following diagrams show the structure of the menu systems which can be accessed via the four
buttons situated at bottom right. 1)
Present only in
conjunction with MENU
AIS, VDR or MENU
NAVTEX ALARMS
connected to the
system Page 181 BUZZER
MENU Page 128 SETTINGS...
DISPLAY SETTINGS... Page 125 TARGET ALARMS...
UTILITIES... Page 126 TRACK/DEPTH ALARMS...
ALARMS...
AIS... Page 83 SENSOR MONITOR...

VDR...
Page 176 NAVTEX...
Page 30 MENU
RADAR CHART AIS
Page 117 SET VOYAGE DATA ...
Present only if there is a
SAFETY MESSAGE
CHARTPILOT installed Page 111
READ... SEND...
Page 112
Page 114 READ...
MENU
DISPLAY SETTINGS Page 97 AIS TGT MANAGEMENT
Page 25 HELP OWN SHIP Page 48 Page 114 AIS SETTINGS...
Page 106 TARGET ID STERN LINE Page 50 Page 96 AIS TARGET PRIORITY
Page 96 TRUE SCALED TARGETS
SYMBOL...
Page 65
MULTIDISPLAY: MENU
Page 150 DOCKING DEPTH Page 152 VDR
Page 151 ZOOM WIND Page 153 Page 173 RESTART ...
Page 154 CAMERA RDF INCIDENT BACKUP ...
SYMBOL SETTINGS
TARGET SYMBOLS
MENU
UTILITIES Page 48 SHADES STANDARD
Page 129 TRIAL MANOEUVRE...
OWN SHIP OUTLINE
Page 211 MAINTENANCE... STANDARD
Page 181 SYSTEM FAULT LIST...
Page 209 PERFORMANCE MONITOR
Page 75 SENSOR MASTER
1)
Because of the individual system configuration, menus might differ from these diagrams. In the descriptions, this is pointed out in individual
cases.
34 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.7 The Menu Structure
RADARPILOT
1) 1)
MAP Radar mode Chart mode CHART
MAP CHART
MAP
USER CHART OBJECTS
Page 64
AIS AIDS-TO-NAV AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
MAP SYMBOLS SYMBOLS SIMPLIFIED
Page 57
SIMPLIFIED AREAS FILLED
TEXT LABELS
EDIT MAP... Page 145
1)
Radar mode
CHARTRADAR 1)
MAP Chart mode CHART
MAP CHART
MAP CHART TYPE ENC
USER CHART OBJECTS
Page 64
AIS AIDS-TO-NAV AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
Page 59
MAP SYMBOLS
AREAS FILLED
SIMPLIFIED
TEXT LABELS
EDIT MAP... Page 145 Page 59 CHART SETTINGS...
1) This button situated between the MENU and TRACK buttons changes its name depending on the display mode.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 35
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.7 The Menu Structure Operating Instructions
TRACK BRILL
Page 26, (only on the
CHARTRADAR) BRILLIANCE
TRACK
GREY MODE
COURSE WPT NUMBER
Page 53 Page 28 DEGAUSS AUTO MAN
LEG WPT SYMBOL
Page 27 BRIGHTNESS
Page 52 LOAD... EDIT... Page 137
CONTRAST
Page 53 CLEAR... DELETE... Page 144 Page 28 PANEL
SYSTEM TRACK:
DAY NIGHT
Page 54 SET... CANCEL Page 56 Page 27
Page 56 SELECT TO-WPT... SETTINGS...
Page 26
BRILLIANCE
SETTINGS
LAMPS
DATA
SCALE
Page 27
VIDEO
SYMBOLS
MARKER
MAP / CHART
RADARPILOT: If there is no CHART-

PILOT installed this field is labelled MAP
36 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 2.8 The Radar Keyboard
2.8 The Radar Keyboard
Printing out the screen content (p. 25)

Setting event markers (p. 135)
Setting of
- brilliance, colour (p. 26)
- keyboard illumination (p. 28) Switching over the
display modes (p. 30)
Activating a non-active
keyboard (p. 38)
Setting the radar video (p. 69)
Setting the vectors of

targets and own ship (p. 48)
Range selection
(p. 44)
Suppression of the synthetics

or video (p. 73)
Centering/off-centering
the display (p. 44)
Operating Manual target acquisition (p. 95)

- VRM’s (p. 85)
- EBL’s (p. 86)
- Parallel index lines (p. 89)
Acknowledging an alarm (p. 179)
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 37
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
2.9 Activating/Deactivating of Slave Keyboards/Trackballs Operating Instructions
2.9 Activating/Deactivating of Slave Keyboards/Trackballs
When a slave monitor is installed together with a trackball and (possibly) a keyboard, this combination
can perform the same functions as the main radar indicator to which these units are connected.
☞ If there are "radar indicators" on the bridge wings, they are often slave monitors and slave
keyboards/trackballs without own electronics unit.
If there are one or more slave keyboards or slave trackballs connected to an indicator, only one of them
is active at a time; operating procedures can be performed only on the one that is active.
In order to determine a workplace as being active, it is also possible to select the slave keyboards or
slave trackballs for a main radar indicator by means of an external switch. (See technical documentation
for Remote Keyboard Electronics for details).
Activating a Keyboard or Trackball

A non-active keyboard or trackball is activated by pressing the DO key for at least three seconds. A short
acoustic signal indicates that the switch-over has taken place.
☞ The keyboard/trackball that had been active up until then is thus deactivated. The associated monitor
acts as a slave monitor.
If there is a keyboard present, activation can also be performed by
at least
pressing one of the keys RADAR MODE, CHART MODE or CONN 3 seconds
or or
MODE for three seconds. In this case, when the activation occurs, the
switch-over assigned to the key is also performed (if applicable) and the
activated state is indicated by the light of one of the MODE keys.
RADAR CHART CONN
MODE
38 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e01.fm / 22.07.09
Radar Functions
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 39
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
40 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 3 PPI Settings
Operating Instructions 3.1 Screen Stabilisation: True Motion, Relative Motion
3 PPI Settings

◆ Basic settings of the PPI
- Screen stabilisation: RM, TM
- Orientation of the display: Head-Up, North-Up, Course-Up
- Centering / off-centering
Selection of range◆Setting of the synthetics elements
- Own ship symbol: heading line, speed vector, past position
plot, path prediction
- Target synthetics: speed vectors, past position plots, trails
Display of the range rings, grid◆Setting the display of tracks,
defining System Track and the NEXT-waypoint
◆ Setting the display of the map (Radar mode only), the User Chart Objects and the AIS objects
◆ Setting the display of the chart for Chart mode
3.1 Screen Stabilisation: True Motion, Relative Motion
As far as the screen stabilisation is concerned, there is a choice between the following:
True Motion (TM): The radar video is fixed; the own ship symbol moves across the screen. The PPI
orientation is North-Up or Course-Up. Either manually, or automatically by means of a TM reset, the
own ship symbol on the PPI is reset in good time before the PPI boundary is reached; this resetting
is done in such a way that the larger part of the PPI lies ahead of own ship.
Relative Motion (RM): Own ship's position is fixed; the radar video moves relative to own ship in accord-
ance with the movement of own ship. As far as the PPI orientation is concerned, it is possible to
choose between Head-Up, North-Up and Course-Up.
Switching Over between TM and RM

Clicking on the stabilisation field causes a switch-over between TM and
RM.
TM
☞
DO
If the PPI orientation setting is Head-Up, then when switch-over to TM
mode takes place there is automatic selection of North-Up and setting RM(R)
of the display of trails to "true". In TM mode, relative trails cannot be
displayed.
In RM mode, there is also an indication in the stabilisation field stating whether the trails and vectors
are displayed as relative RM (R) or true RM (T).
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 41
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3 PPI Settings RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
3.1 Screen Stabilisation: True Motion, Relative Motion Operating Instructions
Manual TM Reset
DO
A TM reset is performed by clicking of the TM RESET button.
☞ The TM RESET button appears, instead of the CENTER button, only TM RESET
when a switch-over to TM mode is performed.
Automatic TM Reset
In good time before an automatic TM reset takes place, the TM RESET button turns red. If the TM reset
is not then performed manually, it takes place automatically.
Automatic Switch-Over to RM in 96 NM Range

By switch-on of the 96 NM range, switching to RM takes place.
42 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.2 PPI Orientation: Head-Up, North-Up, Course-Up
3.2 PPI Orientation: Head-Up, North-Up, Course-Up
As far as the PPI orientation is concerned, there is choice between the following 1):
Head-Up: The heading of own ship points upwards.
☞ Head-Up is available only in RM mode.
North-Up: Geographic north points upwards.
Course-Up: The course which exists at the instant of switch-on or re-orientation of this mode points
upwards.
☞ With every switch-over and re-orientation, the trails are lost; they build up anew in the new mode.
Switching Over between Head-Up and North-Up

When H UP (for Head-Up) or N UP (for North-Up) is displayed in the N UP
orientation field, clicking on this field causes a switch-over between these DO
two modes.
☞ When a switch-over to Head-Up mode takes place, there is an auto-
H UP
matic switch-over to RM mode, and the display of the trails is set to
relative. In Head-Up mode, true trails cannot be displayed.
☞ If in Chart mode Head-Up orientation is set, the display of the chart and the User Chart Objects is
suppressed if the rate of turn is very large.
Switch-Over to Course-Up Mode

1.MORE
Click into the orientation field with the MORE key, and then click on C UP.
H UP H UP
2.DO N UP
C UP
Re-Orientation in Course-Up Mode

DO
When C UP (for Course-Up) is displayed in the orientation field, clicking
on this field causes the PPI to be rotated and fixed in such a way that the C UP
course which exists at the instant of clicking points upwards.
Switch-Over from Course-Up to Head-Up or North-Up

1.MORE
Click into the PPI orientation field with the MORE key, and then click on
H UP (for Head-Up) or N UP (for North-Up). 2.DO H UP C UP
N UP
C UP
1)
For a special application (ferry with reversible heading direction and rotatable bridge console), when the
heading is switched over (and the console is rotated) one of the results is that the headmarker is rotated H UP HM180
through 180° so that the PPI is oriented normally (i.e. in the case of Head-Up the heading line is pointing
upwards, and in the case of North-Up the geographic north is pointing upwards). This status is indicated by the
display "HM180" beside the orientation field.
In another application (tugs on which the indicator is mounted turned through 180°), the entire PPI with contents and bearing scale is
rotated through 180°. In this type of installation, in the case of Head-Up the heading line is pointing downwards. In the case of North-Up
the geographic north is pointing upwards.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 43
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.3 Centering / Off-Centering of the Display Operating Instructions
3.3 Centering / Off-Centering of the Display
If RM mode is selected for the screen stabilisation of the PPI, the reference position 1) can be positioned
at the centre of the PPI or can be fixed at an off-center position.
Centering of the Display

or DO
By operating the CENTER button or CENT key, the reference position
CENT CENTER
is centered in the PPI.
Off-Centering of the Display

Click on the OFF CENT button; then, in the PPI, click on the place that DO
is wanted as the reference position. OFF CENT

☞ The radar video display can be off-centered up to a maximum of
75% of the PPI radius.
Using the keyboard: Move the cursor to the intended position of own OFF
ship's symbol within the PPI, and press the OFF CENT key. CENT
Using the MORE context menu: Within the PPI, click on the intended PPI
1.MORE
position of own ship's symbol with the MORE key, and then click on
OFF CENTER (with the DO key).
2.DO
OFF CENTER
Off-Centering to the Max Ahead Position
1.MORE
Click on the OFF CENT button with the MORE key, and then click on
MAX AHEAD (with the DO key). This off-centering is done in such a OFF CENT
2.DO
way that the larger part of the PPI lies ahead of own ship (as for TM MAX AHEAD
reset).
☞ If the PPI is used in off-centered mode and the reference position is displayed outisde the PPI area,
parts of the graphics (own ship, VRM, EBL) are not visible. This can be avoided by a new selection
of the off-center position
Automatic Centering in the 96 NM Range

By switch-on of the 96 NM range, centering takes place. In the 96 NM range, off-centering is not possible.
3.4 Range Selection
The display range can be chosen from a selection of ten nautical ranges (PPI radius between 0.25 NM
and 96 NM) and two docking ranges (PPI radius 250 m and 500 m) 2).
☞ In the nautical ranges, all distances are stated in NM and all speeds in kn; in the docking ranges, all
distances are stated in metres and all speeds in m/s.
☞ After switch-over, the range display is red until the new range is displayed.
☞ When you switch over to the 96 NM range, a switch-over takes place automatically to relative motion
with a centered display.
1) For reference position, see page 79.

2) For details regarding transmission formats see page 164.
44 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.5 Range Rings, Grid
Selecting the Next Larger or Next Smaller Range

1.
Show into the RANGE field, and then click on for a smaller range
or for a larger range. RANGE 6 NM
☞ The change from the docking ranges to the nautical ranges like- 2.DO 2.DO
wise takes place in this way.
Using the keyboard: The next smaller range is switched on with the
key , and the next larger range is switched on with the key .
RANGE
Selecting a Range Directly; Switching Over from the Nautical

Ranges to the Docking Ranges RANGE 0.75 NM
1.MORE 96 NM
With the MORE key, click into the RANGE field; then click on the 48 NM
24 NM
desired range (nautical or docking). 2.DO 12 NM
If a docking range is switched on, the status message DOCKING 6 NM
3 NM
MODE appears on a coloured background beside the PPI settings.
1.5 NM
0.75 NM
0.5 NM
0.25 NM
500 m
250 m
3.5 Range Rings, Grid
Fixed range rings or a map grid can be displayed. Range rings are concentric circles with the reference
position as their centre 1), and are situated at equal distances from one another.
Selection between Range Rings and Map Grid 1.MORE
Click into the RINGS / GRID field with the MORE key, and then (with
RINGS 1.00 NM
the DO key) click on RINGS or GRID.
RINGS
GRID
2.DO
Switching the Range Rings or Grid On and Off

RINGS OFF
Clicking of the RINGS / GRID field switches the display on and off.
☞
DO
The distance between the range rings is displayed in the RINGS
field. RINGS 1.00 NM
1) For reference position see page 79
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 45
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.6 Own Ship and Target Symbols, Vectors, Past Position Plots Operating Instructions
3.6 Own Ship and Target Symbols, Vectors, Past Position Plots
Own Ship Symbol Own ship symbol

The own ship symbol consists of the Heading line and the Beam line and heading line
(minimized own ship symbol). In the smaller ranges it is also possible
to show the own ship true scaled outline together with the Heading Heading line
and the Beam line. This is only possible if the beam of the own ship Antenna position
symbol exceeds a predefined value. In this case the own ship true scaled
outline
outline is true to scale. 1)
Reference
position
In the SYMBOL SETTINGS menu (see also page 48

Target Symbol Settings) it can be selected to display SYMBOL SETTINGS
the own ship true scaled outline also in higher display TARGET SYMBOLS
ranges. (Setting: OWN SHIP OUTLINE = SMALL) SHADES STANDARD
OWN SHIP OUTLINE

STANDARD or
STANDARD SMALL
The display of the own ship symbol can be switched off, and standard or small outline can be selected,
see page 48.
The own ship symbol is supplemented by the following elements:
- Heading line: It is the extension of the ship's longitudinal axis in the ahead direction and extends to
the edge of the PPI. The heading can be switched off temporarily.
- Simplified Own Ship symbol: A simplified own ship symbol is added to the minimized
own ship sysmbol in Chart Radar Mode if the display button for this function is activated and the treu
scaled outline cannot be displayed in larger ranges.
The origin of the heading line is the reference position for bear-
Own ship symbol
ings 2).
with vector and
- Speed vector: The direction of the vector corresponds to the past position plot
existing course of own ship. The length corresponds to the
existing speed of own ship. Together with the speed vectors of the
Speed vector
tracked targets, the display of the speed vector can be switched
on and off, and the time represented by the displayed vectors can BT WT
be specified. Furthermore, it can be seen from the vector symbol
of own ship whether the vector is relative to the sea (Water Track,
WT = one arrow-head) or relative to the bottom (Bottom Track,
BT = two arrow-heads).
Past position plot

with time markers
1) The dimensions of the own ship outline can be set on service level.
2) For the reference position for bearings, see page 79.
46 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.6 Own Ship and Target Symbols, Vectors, Past Position Plots
- Past position plot: The past position plot corresponds to the past movement of own ship. On it,
there are four time markers, whose distance apart in time can be set. The setting of the time marker
spacing also defines the length of the plot that is displayed. This setting and the on/off switching of
the past plot display take place in common with the past plots and time markers of the targets.
- Stern line: This extension of the heading line in the aft direction Path prediction
as far as the edge of the PPI can be switched on if necessary.
(For the setting procedure, see page 50.)
- Path prediction: In the small display ranges up to 1.5 NM, it is
possible to display the probable track (the predicted path) along
which the own ship will travel if it maintains its existing rate of turn
and its existing speed. The prediction time can be set, see page Prediction
time
50.
Target Symbols
ARPA targets are displayed in all display ranges as a circular symbol
, tracked AIS targets are displayed as a pointed triangle with
heading line 1). The following elements can be provided for ARPA and AIS targets
Speed vector
them:
- Speed vector: The direction of the vector corresponds to the Target being
existing course of the target, and the length corresponds to the plotted
existing speed of the target. Together with the speed vectors of
the own ship symbol, the display of the speed vector can be
Past position
switched on and off. The length of the vector is computed from plot with time
the distance travelled by the vessel in the vector time, as it is markers
called. The vector time can be adjusted.
- Past position plot: For targets being tracked, past position plots
can be displayed. The settings for these plots are made jointly
with those of own ship's past position plot. They have four time
markers at the most, which are set simultaneously on all past
position plots.
All vectors and past position plots can be displayed jointly either relative to own ship (R = relative display)
or over ground or through the water (T = true display). Relative speed vectors are displayed as dotted
lines.
☞ In the case of the relative display, the vector and the past position plot of own ship are non-existent
by definition.
Furthermore, the target symbols are supplemented by symbols of the automatic target tracking function
(see page 92).
The computation of the true (T) vectors is always based on the BT/WT setting which is displayed for the
selected speed sensor of the own ship.
1) For other symbols, see page 92
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 47
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Target Symbol Settings

SYMBOL SETTINGS
In the DISPLAY SETTINGS, SYMBOL...
ON (high- TARGET SYMBOLS
menu it can be selected to show STANDARD or
lighted green) SHADES STANDARD
STANDARD or LARGE AIS and ARPA or OFF LARGE
target symbols. Additionally, it can be
selected to display the targets with/without OWN SHIP OUTLINE
a symbol shade. STANDARD
Switching the Display of the Sleeping

AIS Targets On and Off
☞ Sleeping AIS Targets are targets that have been acquired by the AIS but are not tracked by the
radar.
By clicking on the AIS button, the display of the sleeping targets can
be switched on and off. AIS
DO
If the AIS button has a coloured background, all sleeping targets which
coloured
are present in the geographic region of the PPI and whose data are AIS
being received are displayed; symbol: , see page 92.
Switching the Own Ship Symbol On and Off

MENU
Click on the MENU button, and then, in the DISPLAY SETTINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS
menu, click the OWN SHIP button. OWN SHIP
DO
Alternative: Click on the own ship symbol or own ship position

MORE
(origin of the heading line) with the MORE key and then, click on
HIDE OWN SHIP SYMBOL or SHOW OWN SHIP SYMBOL (with
the DO key).
SET LINE 1
SET LINE 2
OFF CENTER
Page 121 DISPLAY OWN AIS DATA
DO HIDE OWN SHIP SYMBOL
The Setting of Vectors
With the operating procedure described, both the speed vectors of the targets and the vector of own ship
are set.
Switching the Display of the Vectors On and Off

VECTOR OFF T
The display of the own ship vector and of the speed vectors is DO
switched on and off by clicking on the VECTOR field.
VECTOR 6 min T
48 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.6 Own Ship and Target Symbols, Vectors, Past Position Plots
Specifying the Length of the Vectors

The procedure for setting the vector length is performed by speci- DO
VECTOR TIME
2.c 6 min
fying the travelling time represented by the vectors:
90 min
Click on the VECTOR field with the MORE key; then, in the Dialog 60 min
that is opened as a result, either 30 min
12 min
a) click on the desired numerical value, or 6min
DO
b) click into the (vertical) bar-area, drag the bar to the desired 2.a 3 min
value, and press the DO key, or 2 min
c) click into the upper numerical field and enter the value with the 1 min
DO 0.5 min
virtual keyboard. 2.b
OFF
VECTOR 6 min T
1.MORE
Using the keyboard: Press the VECTORS TIME key, and use the
trackball to set the vector length. TIME
VECTORS
Switching the Vectors to Relative or True Display

REL
The switch-over is performed by clicking into the right-hand VECTOR TRUE
field or by pressing the VECTORS REL/TRUE key.
or VECTORS
☞ This switch-over takes place jointly for vectors and for past posi- VECTOR 6 min R
tion plots. Therefore, switching over can also be performed by PAST POSN 1 min R
clicking on the right-hand PAST POSN field.
DO
☞ If the relative display is set, the vector and the past position plot
VECTOR 6 min T
of own ship are non-existent by definition.
PAST POSN 1 min T
Setting the Past Position Plot

PAST POSN OFF
Switching the Past Position Plot On and Off DO
The display of the past position plot is switched on and off by clicking PAST POSN 6 min
on the PAST POSN field.
Specifying the Time Interval between the Time Markers 12 min

Click on the PAST POSN field with the MORE key, and then click on 6 min
2.DO
3 min
the desired time value. 2 min
1 min
30 sec
1.MORE 15 sec
Switching the Past Position Plots to Relative or True Display OFF
PAST POSN 6 min T
The switch-over is performed by clicking into the right-hand PAST
POSN field.
☞ This switch-over is performed jointly for past position plots and
for vectors. Therefore, switching over can also be performed by VECTOR 6 min R
clicking on the right-hand VECTOR field. PAST POSN 1 min R
☞ If the relative display is set, the vector and the past position plot DO
of own ship are non-existent by definition. VECTOR 6 min T

PAST POSN 1 min T
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 49
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Setting the Path Prediction Function
Switching the Path Prediction Function On and Off PATH OFF

The path prediction function is switched on and off by clicking on the
DO
PATH field.
☞ When the path prediction function is switched on, its display is
PATH 60 sec
presented only in the display ranges less than 3 NM and only if

particular conditions are fulfilled, such as adequate speed and a
rate of turn which can be determined.
Specifying the Length of Path Prediction PATH

2c.DO
With the MORE key, click on the PATH field. This causes a Dialog 60 sec
180 sec
to open. In that Dialog, either
2a.DO
120 sec
a) click on the desired numerical value, or 60 sec
b) click into the (vertical) bar area, pull the bar to the desired value 2b.DO
30 sec
and press the DO key, or 20 sec
1.MORE 10 sec
c) click into the upper numerical field and enter the value with the OFF
virtual keyboard. PATH 60 sec
Selecting the Colour of the Path Prediction Symbol DO
The colour of the path prediction symbol can be changed: With the
PATH
MORE key, click on the PATH field and then on the field next to 60 sec
PATH (with the DO key).
Switching the Stern Line On and Off

MENU
Click on the MENU button, and then, in the DISPLAY SETTINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS
menu, click the STERN LINE button. DO
STERN LINE
If the heading line has been switched off by the described action,
it will reappear automatically after the cursor has been moved away from the
50 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.7 Trails of Radar Targets
3.7 Trails of Radar Targets
In the true display, trails make it possible to reach a conclusion quickly about the manoeuvre performed
by radar targets. In the relative display, the trails provide a quick overview of the danger situation (a
constant bearing). However, only qualitative information can be obtained from them.
For radar echoes moving on the PPI, trails can be displayed. These trails can be varied as follows:
- The display of these trails can be switched on and off.
- Their length can be specified.
- If the screen stabilisation is set to RM, the trails can be displayed with the PPI orientation North-Up
and Course-Up relative to own ship or with true (absolute) orientation, i.e. in relation to the sea
bottom 1).
- The trails can be deleted so that they have to build up again.
Switching the Display of the Trails On and Off

TRAILS OFF
The display of the trails is switched on and off by clicking on the TRAILS
DO
field.
TRAILS 10 min
Specifying the Length of the Trails

Click on the TRAILS field with the MORE key; then, in the Dialog that is TRAILS
opened as a result, either 2.c 12 min
DO
a) click on the desired time, or 90 min
b) click into the (vertical) bar-area, drag the bar to the desired value, and 60 min
press the DO key, or 30 min
DO 12 min
c) click into the upper numerical field and enter the value with the virtual 2.a 6min
keyboard. 3 min
☞ If the trails are lengthened, they reach the new specified length only
2 min
1 min
after the time difference (i.e. in the case of switching over from 12 to 2.b
DO 0.5 min
30 minutes, 18 minutes will pass before the trails correspond to a OFF
length of 30 minutes). RESET
TRAILS 12 min T
The reduction of the trail length too takes some time.
In the TRAILS field, the length currently being displayed is indicated. 1.MORE
Switching the Trails to Relative or True Display

The switch-over is performed by clicking into the right-hand TRAILS field.
☞ The switch-over is possible only in the RM modes North-Up and TRAILS 12 min T
Course-Up. In TM mode, the trails displayed are always true; in the
DO
RM mode Head-Up, they are always relative.
Deletion of Trails
1 min
Click on the TRAILS field with the MORE key; then, in the Dialog that is 0.5 min
OFF
opened as a result, click (with the DO key) on RESET.
RESET
☞ The trails are also deleted whenever a switch-over occurs which TRAILS 12 min T
2.DO
changes the entire radar video (RM/TM, PPI orientation, range, 1.MORE
center/off-center), but they then appear again.
1) or in relation to the water, depending on the selected speed sensor. The sensor indicated in the speed sensor field is used.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 51
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.8 Setting the Display of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions
3.8 Setting the Display of Pre-planned Tracks
Pre-planned tracks are planned tracks whose routes are defined by the geographical coordinates of the
waypoints and by the curve radii of the curved paths along which the ship has to sail at the waypoints 1).
These tracks must be generated beforehand on the radar system (see Section 15) or on a connected
CHARTPILOT.
If the system configuration is suitable, it is also possible to display tracks that are present in a connected
GPS receiver. 2)
It is possible to specify whether pre-planned tracks are to be displayed, and if so, which ones. Further-
more, it is possible to specify which elements of the tracks are to be displayed.
☞ The selection of the pre-planned tracks that are to be displayed and the specifying of the track
elements that are to be displayed affect only the item of equipment being operated.
Selecting the Track that is to be Displayed

TRACK
If there is a CHARTPILOT in the system, it must be in the
switched-on state, because in this case the track data are phys- COURSE WPT NUMBER
ically stored there. LEG WPT SYMBOL
2.DO
1. Open the TRACK menu by clicking on the TRACK button. LOAD... EDIT...
CLEAR... DELETE...
2. When you click on the LOAD button, the list of existing
track catalogs appears in the Multidisplay. SYSTEM TRACK:
3. Click on the desired catalog. As a result, the list of tracks SET... CANCEL
contained in the catalog appears. Tracks which have SELECT TO-WPT...
already been selected for the display are marked in that
list.
LOAD TRACKS
4. Click on the track that is to be additionally displayed, and /
then click on the LOAD button. This must be repeated for Catalog
further tracks if necessary. WORLD
NORTHSEA
☞ Tracks that are present in the connected GPS receiver can 3.DO BALTIC
be called up in the catalog RouteSensor 3). ATLANTIC
LOAD TRACKS
/ATLANTIC
4a.DO
No. Name
1301 HELSINKI-BRIXHAM
1304 BRIXHAM-FREEPORT
1307 FREEPORT-MIAMI
1308 FREEPORT-MIAMI 1
4b.DO
LOAD CLOSE
1) And also by specifying whether the track sections longer than 25 NM between two waypoints are to be displayed as rhumb lines or as great
circles.
2) On systems without CHARTPILOT only. The system sets the sailing mode of these waypoints to Rhumb Line; no radius is entered. If neces-
sary, these tracks can be modified with the track editor and stored on the RADARPILOT - see Section 15.
3) At service level, a different name can be given to this catalog.
52 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.8 Setting the Display of Pre-planned Tracks
Switching Off the Display of a Track

1. Open the TRACK menu by clicking on the TRACK button. TRACK
2.DO
2. Click on the CLEAR button. The list of displayed tracks CLEAR...
appears in the Multidisplay.
3. By clicking, mark the tracks that are no longer to be
displayed, and click on the CLEAR button. CLEAR TRACKS
No. Name
Display of the Tracks 3a.DO 1301 HELSINKI-BRIXHAM
Pre-planned tracks appear on the PPI as dotted lines, together 1303 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 3
with their waypoints, track curves and the wheel-over points 1304 BRIXHAM-FREEPORT
computed by the system, possibly including the waypoint 3b.DO
numbers and the courses of the legs 1). CLEAR CLOSE
The colour of the tracks is orange, except for the System Track,
which is displayed in red with a thick long-dashed line. See Figure on page 56
5
Pre-planned track
116
Waypoint, with serial number 4

Parameter point, see Operating
Instructions of the CHARTPILOT
3 Leg, with a statement of the course
Wheel-over point
60
Defining Track Elements that are to be Displayed

TRACK
For the individual elements of the displayed tracks, it is possible
to define whether they are to be displayed. These definitions 2.DO COURSE WPT NUMBER
are applicable to all displayed tracks 2). LEG WPT SYMBOL
1. Open the TRACK menu by clicking on the TRACK button.

2. Switch the display of the elements on or off by clicking:
- COURSE for the display of the courses of the legs
- LEG for the display of the lines and symbols of the wheel-over point
- WPT NUMBER for the display of the waypoint numbers
- WPT SYMBOL for the display of the waypoint (and parameter point) symbols
1) The track segment defined by two consecutive waypoints is called a leg.

2) The tracks of the connected GPS receiver consist only of waypoints which are joined to one another by the dashed line.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 53
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.9 Defining the System Track and the TO-Waypoint; TRACK DATA Display Operating Instructions
3.9 Defining the System Track and the TO-Waypoint; TRACK DATA Display
When a track is sailed, it should be defined as the System Track. This gives the track the following
special properties:
- Its present data are displayed in the TRACK DATA display or the WAYPOINT DATA display
(described below).
- The track monitoring is performed with reference to the System Track.
- Any CHARTPILOT which is connected uses the System Track for the chart monitoring. There an up-
to-date passage plan can be generated on the basis of this track, containing the passage times and
possibly also the planned speeds.
- The System Track is displayed in red (instead of orange) with a thick long-dashed line style.
While the ship is approaching the System Track or is sailing along it, it is possible to explicitly define
which waypoint of the System Track is to be approached directly. The route to that place is displayed
additionally in the same way as the System Track.
☞ The defining of the System Track and of the TO-waypoint is applicable for all items of equipment in
the system.
☞ If the system configuration is suitable, the System Track (the working route or the complete route,
depending on settings on service level) is also available on the connected GPS receiver.
Defining the System Track

TRACK
The track that is to be defined as the System Track must
already be selected for the display.
SYSTEM TRACK:
1. Open the TRACK menu by clicking on the TRACK button. 2.DO
SET... CANCEL
2. Click on the SET button situated under SYSTEM TRACK. SELECT TO-WPT...
As a result, the list of displayed tracks appears in the Multi-
display. If a System Track has already been defined, it is
marked here. SET SYSTEM TRACK
3. By clicking, mark the track that is to become the (new) 3a.DO No. Name
System Track, and click on the SET button. 1) 1301 HELSINKI-BRIXHAM
☞ 1303 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 3
3b.DO
As soon as the System Track is defined, its data can be SET CLOSE
displayed in form of the TRACK DATA display or the
WAYPOINT DATA display.
1)
If the ship is already off the System Track, then the track and course limits contained in the System Track take effect and appear in the
TRACK/DEPTH ALARMS Dialog.
54 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.9 Defining the System Track and the TO-Waypoint; TRACK DATA Display
The TRACK DATA Display

The data of the System Track can be displayed in the TRACK DATA display at the bottom of the side
strip.
☞ If the TRACK DATA display is covered over by another display, it can be brought back into the fore-
ground by clicking on the OTHER button 1) and TRACK DATA.
The TRACK DATA display contains the number and name of the System Track and the numbers and
names of the FROM-waypoint (FROM WPT, the waypoint passed last) and of the TO-waypoint (TO
WPT), as well as the most important currently valid data relating to the System Track:
Number and name of TRACK DATA

the System Track TRACK 1003 BRIGHTON OSLO Number and name of the TO-waypoint
FROM WPT 7 DEEP SEA PILOT
Currently valid sailing mode
TO WPT 8 GAS FIELD
Number and name of Currently valid track control mode
RHUMB LINE TO TRACK
the FROM-waypoint Direction of the currently valid leg (leg to the TO-waypoint)
(only in the track
control mode To TRK 349.3° XTD R 13 m
Deviation from the System Track;
Track) R = the ship is situated to the right of the track
WPB 348.9° WPD 32.5 NM
Distance from the TO-waypoint
ETA FEB 07 19:23:25 UTC
Bearing of the TO-waypoint
TTG 01:48:19 WOP
Estimated time of arrival at the TO-waypoint 1) 2)
Distance from the wheel-over point of the TO-waypoint 2)
1) Estimated time to go to the TO-waypoint 1) 2)
Assuming that the ship maintains its present speed.
2)
When the distance from the wheel-over point (WOP) is displayed, the values of ETA and TTG refer to that WOP
The WAYPOINT DATA Display

The data of the TO-waypoint can be displayed in the WAYPOINT DATA display at the bottom of the side
strip.
☞ If the WAYPOINT DATA display is covered over by another display, it can be brought back into the
foreground by clicking on the OTHER button 1) and WAYPOINT DATA.
WAYPOINT DATA
Bearing of the TRACK 1003 BRIGHTON OSLO Number and name of
TO-waypoint the System Track
TO WPT 8 GAS FIELD
WPB 348.9° WPD 11.5 NM
Direction of the currently Number and name of the
TRK 349.3° TO-waypoint
valid leg (leg to the
TO-waypoint) NEXT 315.0° RAD 1.2 NM
Distance from the TO-
Direction of the next leg call pilot waypoint
Radius planned for the

Notes for the TO- TO-waypoint
waypoint check GPS and log
1) OTHER button see T h e H i d d e n O T H E R B u t t o n on page 23
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 55
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.9 Defining the System Track and the TO-Waypoint; TRACK DATA Display Operating Instructions
Defining the TO-Waypoint

TRACK
In order to display the path leading to the System Track, it is
necessary to specify the waypoint at which that path meets the
System Track. That waypoint is called the "TO-waypoint". SYSTEM TRACK:
1. Open the TRACK menu by clicking on the TRACK button. 2.DO
SET... CANCEL
SELECT TO-WPT...
2. Click on the SELECT TO-WPT button situated under
SYSTEM TRACK. As a result, the waypoint list of the
System Track appears in the Multidisplay and the
according data displays are cleared. SELECT TO-WPT
/ATLANTIC/1301
3. By clicking, mark the waypoint that is to be approached, No. Name
and click on the SELECT button. 36 BUOY 11
37 KATTEGATT
3a.DO 38 KUMMELBANKE
39 DEEP SEA PILOT
39 40 SKAGERAK
Pre-planned track 41 HANSTHOLM
42 FRIESLAND
43 GAS FIELD
3b.DO
SELECT CLOSE
38
Waypoint No. 39 has been defined
as the TO-waypoint. The approach
track leading to this waypoint
(including the wheel-over point and
curve) is displayed additionally.
Cancelling the Definition of the System Track

TRACK
If a System Track is already defined but is to be deselected:
Click on the TRACK button and then on the CANCEL button DO
SYSTEM TRACK:
situated under SYSTEM TRACK. As a result, the definition of
the System Track is cancelled. SET... CANCEL
SELECT TO-WPT...
☞ Because System Tracks appear on all radar indicators and
can also be cancelled there, cancelling causes disappear-
ance of the track on all radar indicators on which the track has not been loaded (for loading, see
page 52, S e l e c t i n g t h e T r a c k t h a t i s t o b e D i s p l a y e d ).
56 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.10 Setting the Display of Chart Objects on the RADARPILOT
3.10 Setting the Display of Chart Objects on the RADARPILOT
☞ For display of the Chart Objects on the CHARTRADAR, see page 58.
If there is a CHARTPILOT connected to the radar system, the
CHART
User Chart Objects 1) that are present in the CHARTPILOT can
also be displayed on the RADARPILOT. The display of the User
Chart Objects takes place in Chart mode only. USER CHART OBJECTS
AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
The necessary settings are made in the CHART menu:
SYMBOLS SIMPLIFIED
Open the CHART menu by clicking on the CHART button. AREAS FILLED
TEXT LABELS
Switching the Display of User Chart Objects On/Off DO

USER CHART OBJECTS
Click on the USER CHART OBJECTS button.
Switching the Display of the Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations On and Off
Aids-to-Navigation are navigation marks which are reported by the AIS system. For their display, the
same symbols are used as for the Map and the User Chart Objects. In addition, they are marked by
means of a blue circle having its centre at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation.
Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centre.
Symbol: surrounded by a blue circle.
Their display is switched on and off in the CHART menu by DO
clicking on the AIS AIDS-TO-NAV button. AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
Setting the Display of the Areas

As far as the display of the areas is concerned, it is possible to
choose between display of the area outlines and display of the
area colours. DO
Setting is performed in the CHART menu with the AREAS AREAS FILLED
FILLED button.
Switching Texts On/Off

It is possible to define whether the User Chart Objects designa- DO
tions (entered during editing of the User Chart Objects) and the TEXT LABELS
text labels of the event markers and position fixes can be
displayed. This setting is performed in the CHART menu with
the TEXT LABELS button.
1) Information about User Chart Objects see Operating Instructions of the CHARTPILOT
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 57
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.11 Setting the Display of Charts and Chart Objects on the CHARTRADAR Operating Instructions
Defining the Symbol Presentation

For the symbols, it is possible to define whether they are to be
1.DO
displayed in the same way as in the paper charts (PAPER
CHARTS) or in a simplified form more suitable for the screen
(SIMPLIFIED). In the SIMPLIFIED presentation, the symbols
SYMBOLS SIMPLIFIED
consist only of contours, and therefore cover the video to a lesser PAPER CHART
extent than with the PAPER CHARTS presentation. SIMPLIFIED
The setting procedure: In the CHART menu, click on the 2.DO
SYMBOLS field and then click on the desired presentation.

☞ With this setting, the presentation of the Aids-to-Navigation
and base stations is switched over also.
Optimum Setting for Radar Video Observation with User Chart Objects Switched On
- Display of the area contours only (AREAS FILLED = OFF).
- TEXT LABELS switched to OFF.
3.11 Setting the Display of Charts and Chart Objects on the CHARTRADAR
On the CHARTRADAR, it is also possible to display electronic charts and the User Chart Objects existing
in the system's CHARTPILOT 1).
The most important display of the electronic charts in the system is the display on the CHARTPILOT,
which is usually approved as an ECDIS. There, all of the system's display and operating functions that
are relevant for this purpose are available. Some of them are also available on the CHARTRADAR.
Important Differences between the CHARTRADAR and the CHARTPILOT

Additionally present on the CHARTRADAR:
- The electronic chart, the User Chart Objects and the radar video are displayed simultaneously in the
PPI.
- The areas of the electronics chart and User Chart Objects can be replaced by their contours (so that
the radar video stands out better from the electronic chart).
Not present on the CHARTRADAR:
- Only vector charts (i.e. no raster charts, e.g. ARCS or RNC charts) and User Chart Objects can be
displayed.
- The info system (detailed information about the individual chart objects) exists only on the CHART-
PILOT. This also contains the information about the date and number of the last ENC update.
- The depth contours (safety contour, shallow contour and deep contour, safety depth) are set on the
CHARTPILOT and are taken over for the display on the CHARTRADAR.
☞ The subjects of electronic charts and User Chart Objects are described in detail in the CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions. In the Operating Instructions that you are now reading, it is assumed that you
already possess the knowledge of operating the CHARTPILOT.
Failure safety of CHARTRADAR mode
1)
If there is more than one CHARTPILOT, the CHARTPILOT from which the data and settings of the electronic chart are taken over is spec-
ified for each radar at service level.
58 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.11 Setting the Display of Charts and Chart Objects on the CHARTRADAR
In case of a broken data connection between the chart server and the CHARTRADAR or any kind of
failure serving the charts,the chart data will no longer be superimposed into the radar picture. The alarm
message CHART SERVER OFFLINE will be displayed, the functionality of the radar will not be disturbed
in any way. It is recommended to switch back to Radar mode then.Projection and reference used for
the chart display
In the PPI, only the radar projection is used. Chart data are superimposed in such a way that they fit with
the radar projection. Switchover to other methods of projection is not possible on the CHARTRADAR.
If the reference position is switched by means of the REF function (see chapters 1.5 and 5.4), the refer-
ence for the display of the chart data moves simultaneously.
CHART Menu and CHART SETTINGS dialogues

CHART
The most important settings are made in the CHART menu:
Open the CHART menu by clicking on the CHART button. CHART TYPE ENC
USER CHART OBJECTS
Further setting possibilities are contained in the CHART AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
SETTINGS dialogues: In the CHART menu, click on the CHART
SETTINGS button with MORE, then click (with DO) on the
AREAS FILLED
desired dialogue.
TEXT LABELS
2.DO
VISIBILITY SETTINGS Page 61
Page 62 CHART SETTINGS...
1.MORE
VISIBILITY GROUPS
CHART SETTINGS...
☞ If a CHART SETTINGS dialogue is already being

displayed, it is possible to switch over to the other CHART CHART SETTINGS
DO
SETTINGS dialogues after clicking on the dialogue name. VISIBILITY OPTIONS
Switching the Display of the Electronic Chart On/Off, Selecting the Chart Type
☞ Some settings are alternatively possible with the aid of the chart button in the corner area. This
button is situated in the bottom right-hand corner area between the EVENT button and the PATH
button, and mainly has the task of displaying the type of the selected chart. In the following, this
possibility will be referred to in individual cases.
Switching the Display of the Vector Chart On/Off DO

CHART
In the CHART menu, click on the CHART button.
☞ With the chart button in the corner area also, the display of the chart can be switched on: Click
on the chart button with MORE, then (with DO) click on CHART ON.
Selecting the Chart Type 1.DO
In the CHART menu, click on the TYPE field and then click on the CHART TYPE ENC
desired chart type. 2.DO
ENC
CM-93/3Pro
☞ This can be done in the same way with the chart button in OWN
the corner area as well.
If other than the official approved ENC chart data are selected,
the chart button in the corner area appears in yellow. If the No official chart data available.
cursor is situated over this button, corresponding information Please refer to paper chart.
appears:
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 59
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Switching the Display of the User Chart Objects On/Off DO

USER CHART OBJECTS
In the CHART menu, click on the USER CHART OBJECTS
button.
Switching the Display of the Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations On and Off
Aids-to-Navigation are navigation marks which are reported by the AIS system. For their display, the
same symbols are used as for the User Chart Objects and the electronic chart of type ENC. In addition,
they are marked by means of a blue circle having its centre at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation.
Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centre.
Symbol: surrounded by a blue circle.
Their display is switched on and off in the CHART menu by DO
clicking on the AIS AIDS-TO-NAV button. AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
Setting the Display of the Areas

As far as the display of the areas is concerned, it is possible to choose between display of the area
outlines and display of the area colours:
Setting is performed in the CHART menu with the AREAS DO
FILLED button. AREAS FILLED
☞ After the switch-over, generation of the new picture might

take several seconds.
AREAS FILLED switched on: The areas are displayed with the colours of the electronic chart or as grey
areas (in Grey mode - see page 26).
AREAS FILLED switched off: Only the contours of the areas are displayed, so that the radar video is
disturbed as little as possible.
☞ If only the contours of the
areas are displayed, the area Safety contour
between safety contour and
land area is additionally
marked with the shallow water Shallow water
pattern
pattern. The land areas are
provided with a similar but
coloured and much denser
pattern. Land area
with pattern
Switching Names, Designations and Texts On/Off

Because of the particular importance of the display group text DO
labels, it can be switched on and off directly in the CHART menu TEXT LABELS
with the TEXT LABELS button.
☞ In this way, the text labels of all objects of the vector chart, of the User Chart Objects, of event
markers and of position fixes are switched on/off.
60 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09

The setting is made in the CHART SETTINGS dialogue VISI- CHART SETTINGS
BILITY SETTINGS: In the CHART menu, click with MORE on VISIBILITY SETTINGS
the CHART SETTINGS button and then click (with DO) on CATEGORY STANDARD
VISIBILITY SETTINGS. SYMBOLS SIMPLIFIED
☞ Use the MORE button in order to step through the sub-

menus of CHART SETTINGS.
MORE CLOSE
For the symbols, it is possible to define whether they are to be

1. DO
displayed in the same way as in the paper charts (PAPER
CHARTS) or in a simplified form more suitable for the screen
SYMBOLS SIMPLIFIED
(SIMPLIFIED).
2. DO PAPER CHART
The setting procedure: In the VISIBILITY SETTINGS dialogue, SIMPLIFIED
click on the SYMBOLS field and then click on the desired pres-
entation.
☞ With this setting, the presentation of the Aids-to-Navigation and base stations is switched over also.
Specifying the Objects to be Displayed

The various objects contained in the vector chart (symbols, lines, areas, texts) are grouped to form
display groups. For the task of selecting the display groups that are to be displayed, IMO has defined the
categories Display Base and Display Standard. On the CHARTRADAR, it is possible to switch over
between these categories and the display of all objects contained (category All).
Switching Over between the Display Group Categories: 1. DO
The setting procedure: In the CHART SETTINGS dialogue VISI-

BILITY SETTINGS, click on the CATEGORY field and then click CATEGORY BASE
on the desired category. BASESIMPLIFIED
STANDARD (DEF)
☞ Alternative operating procedure: Click on the chart button 2. DO ALL
in the corner area with MORE, and then click on the
desired category.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 61
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Displaying Additional Display Groups and Suppressing the Display of Display Groups
For each category, it is possible to define whether particular
CHART SETTINGS
display groups are to be displayed:
VISIBILITY GROUPS
The setting is made in the CHART SETTINGS dialogue VISI- Cautionary Area
BILITY GROUPS: In the CHART menu, click with MORE on the Information Areas
CHART SETTINGS button and then click (with DO) on VISI- Light/Fog Signals
BILITY GROUPS. 3. DO
Pilot Signal Stations
Service Stations
In the list which then opens, the display of these display groups Standard Land Features
can be switched on/off for the selected category by clicking (the Other Land Features
list can be scrolled).
MORE CLOSE
☞ If, with the categories Base and Standard, the display of
additional display groups is switched on, a plus sign Scrolling the list
appears additionally in the CATEGORY field. If, with the Selection is also possible by clicking
categories Standard and All, the display of display groups on the MORE button
is suppressed, a minus sign appears additionally in the
CATEGORY field.
Using the "Primary Chart Information Set" on the CHARTRADAR

The "Primary Chart Information Set" includes coastlines, own ship´s safety contour, dangers to navigation
like shallows (depending on the safety contour), bridges and overhead power lines, and fixed or floated
aids to navigation as defined by the IMO.
These objects are the most important and least numerous chart information needed for safe navigation.
It is adviseable to use this set for general purposes, especially with radar overlay.
In order to have the Primary Chart Information Set displayed, set 1. DO
the CATEGORY to BASE, select CHART SETTINGS and VISI-
BILITY GROUPS, then choose BUOYS AND BEACONS as the CATEGORY BASE
only highlighted entry in the list. BASE
2. DO STANDARD
ALL
CHART SETTINGS
VISIBILITY GROUPS
Cautionary Area
Information Areas
DO Traffic Routes
Buoys and Beacons
Light/Fog Signals
Pilot Signal Stations
Standard Land Features
MORE CLOSE
62 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Resetting the Individual Selection 1. DO
The selection for the display groups are stored, i.e. they remain
in effect even after switch-over of the category (in contrast to the CATEGORY STANDARD +
CHARTPILOT). However, the groupings can also be reset to the +
BASESIMPLIFIED
IMO-defined values by switching over. 2.DO STANDARD (DEF)
ALL –
In the CHART SETTINGS dialogue VISIBILITY SETTINGS, click Selects the
2.DO
on the CATEGORY field and again select the category that is still category Base
(including additional Resets the category
selected. display-groups) Standard to the IMO-
☞ Alternative operating procedure: Click on the chart button defined values
in the corner area with MORE, and again select the cate-
gory that is still selected.
Optimum Setting for Radar Video Observation with the Electronic Chart Switched On
- Display of the area contours only (AREAS FILLED = OFF).
- Displaying only the necessary objects (category Base is recommended).
- TEXT LABELS switched to OFF.
- Switching on the display of the necessary depth-contours only (on the CHARTPILOT) (i.e. possibly
suppressing shallow contour and depth contour).
- The Grey mode (see page 26) might produce an improvement in the display.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 63
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.12 Setting the Display of the Map Objects Operating Instructions
3.12 Setting the Display of the Map Objects
In the Radar mode, it is possible to display a map which was edited previously on this radar indicator
(according to Section 16) or which was transferred from another item of equipment in the system
(according to Section 27.5).
The map can be used as a very simplified replacement of the chart display in combination with the Radar
mode.
The map can contain lines (for land contours, channel limits etc.)
and symbols (for buoys, beacons, wrecks). The symbols used MAP
are listed in Section 16. The symbols can be displayed either in MAP
Outline mode, in Paper Chart mode or in Simplified mode,
whichever is selected. AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
The necessary settings are made in the MAP menu:

MAP SYMBOLS
Switch over to Radar mode, and open the MAP menu by clicking SIMPLIFIED
on the MAP button.
EDIT MAP...
Switching the Display of the Map On/Off
In the MAP menu, click on the MAP button.
DO
☞ As long as the EDIT MAP Dialog remains open (see page MAP
145, the display of the map cannot be switched off.
Switching the Display of the AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations On and Off
AIS Aids-to-Navigation and base stations can be displayed in DO
Radar mode also 1). Their display is switched on and off in the AIS AIDS-TO-NAV
MAP menu by clicking on the AIS AIDS-TO-NAV button.

As described on page 58 for the chart objects, the symbol pres-
1.DO
entation of the map objects can be set in Radar mode also. In
addition to PAPER CHART symbols and SIMPLIFIED symbols, it
MAP SYMBOLS
is possible here to select OUTLINE symbols. They are similar to OUTLINE
the PAPER CHART symbols, but they have no filled areas and OUTLINE
are therefore particularly suitable for radar observation. PAPER CHART
SIMPLIFIED
The setting procedure: In the MAP menu, click on the MAP 2.DO
SYMBOLS field and then click on the desired presentation.
1) see page 57
64 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 3.13 Adjusting the Chart or Map to the Radar Video
3.13 Adjusting the Chart or Map to the Radar Video
If the majority of the symbols of the electronic chart or map are displaced relative to their radar echoes
of these targets, it can be assumed that the position transferred from the selected position sensor is incor-
rect. 1)
If no position data having greater accuracy are available, then the electronic chart together with the User
Chart Objects and the map can be shifted in such a way that symbols and the associated echoes coin-
cide. This correction is described on page 82.
☞ Rotation of the entire video relative to the map indicates that the heading value is incorrect. The
cause of this might be a faulty compass, or else non-synchronous transfer of the course (for synchro-
nisation of the course transfer, see page 76). However, errors of this kind also occur also if the
compass system does not perform a speed error correction or no dynamic correction; these faults
should then be corrected in the compass system, if possible.
3.14 Setting the Display of the RDF Target Bearing
If there is a radio direction finder (RDF) connected, the bearing determined by the RDF can be displayed
as a dotted line starting at own ship's symbol.
Switching the Display of the RDF target bearing On/Off

2.DO MENU
Click on the MENU button. Then, in the DISPLAY SETTINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS
menu, click on the RDF button.
3.DO
☞ The RDF button is only available, if a RDF is connected to RDF
the radar system.
1)
If symbols of the User Chart Objects or the symbols of the map are displaced relative to their radar echoes of these targets, it must also
be considered whether the positions of these symbols have been entered incorrectly.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 65
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
3.14 Setting the Display of the RDF Target Bearing Operating Instructions
66 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 4 Setting the Radar Function
Operating Instructions 4.1 Radar Function On/Off, Interswitch Functions, Master/Slave Switch-Over
4 Setting the Radar Function

◆ Switching the radar function on
◆ Transceiver selection
◆ Defining the master/slave function
◆ Switching the radar function off (switching to stand-by)
◆ Setting the radar signal:
- Tuning the frequency (TUNE)
- Input amplification (GAIN)
- Sea clutter suppression (SEA)
- Rain clutter suppression (RAIN)
- Clean Sweep function
- Interference rejection (IR)
- Pulse length
◆ Selection of antenna revolution rate
◆ Suppression of synthetics and video
◆ Special radar-settings HSC
4.1 Radar Function On/Off, Interswitch Functions, Master/Slave Switch-Over
On any radar indicator, any transceiver of the system can be switched to act as the master. On the
master indicator, the radar is operated completely, i.e. both the transmitter side and the receiver side.
Any radar indicator can also be switched to act as a slave of any transceiver that is operating. On the
slave indicator, most of the functions on the reception side can be set independently of the master 1).
Switch-On of Radar Operation

DANGER:
At the instant of switch-on of the radar function, the antenna begins to
rotate and the emission of high frequency radiation 2) is started. In the
case of multiple installations, it can also happen that, instead of the
expected antenna, a different one begins to rotate. Therefore, it must be
ensured beforehand that the antennas can rotate freely and that there is
nobody present close to the antenna turning circles.
The radar transceiver selected last is switched to radar operation by 1.DO

clicking into the transceiver field and then clicking on the transceiver
TX/RX STBY --
designation that is displayed. 1(X) ON
2.DO
1) Tuning, sea clutter suppression, pulse length (and also the antenna revolution rate) are defined only on the master indicator.
2) For the danger posed by high frequency radiation, see page 4.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 67
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
4 Setting the Radar Function RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
If the selected transceiver was already running in radar operation mode, the result is that the indicator
being operated becomes the slave indicator. 1)
If some other transceiver is to be switched on, this is done as follows:
Selecting a Radar Transceiver

If you click into the transceiver field with the MORE key, the numbers of 1.MORE
the installed transceivers are listed, together with the information as to
TX/RX 1(X) SP
whether they are X-Band or S-Band transceivers and a statement of the 1(X) MAIN
antenna position 2). By clicking, you can specify which transceiver is to 2.DO
2(S) MAIN
be operated from that indicator. 3(X) BOW
4(X) STERN
If the transceiver on which you have clicked is not yet in radar operation
mode, this action switches it into radar operation mode and the indicator
being operated becomes the master indicator.
If the transceiver on which you have clicked was already in radar operation mode, this action switches
the indicator being operated so that it acts as a slave indicator of that transceiver.
Switching a Slave Indicator so that it Becomes the Master 1.DO
On the slave indicator, click into the transceiver field and then click on TX/RX 1(X) SP
MASTER. TX OFF
MASTER
2.DO
As a result, the previous master indicator becomes a slave.
Switching the Indicator to Stand-By Mode 1.DO
Click into the transceiver field, and then click on TX OFF. TX/RX 1(X) SP
2.DO
TX OFF
MASTER
Switching the Transceiver into Stand-By Mode
If the last indicator which is switched to the transceiver is switched into
Stand-By mode, this action switches the transceiver too into Stand-By
mode.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Danger Posed by High Frequency Radiation

There is no international agreement about the danger posed by high frequency radiation of the kind
produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m2 is considered
to be dangerous; in some countries, values over 10 W/m2 are regarded as not being completely safe.
The distances from the various antennas at which the radiation density is 100 W/m2 and 10 W/m2 are
stated on page 3.
☞ The rotation of the antenna is monitored. If, because of a defect or the use of the antenna safety
switch, the antenna stops rotating, the transceiver is automatically switched off.
1) A slave indicator is marked as such by the entry SLAVE behind the TUNE field.
2) The designations of the antenna positions can be freely edited at service level.
68 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting of the Radar Video
4.2 Basic Setting of the Radar Video
So that radar targets can be detected with certainty, an optimum setting of the TX/RX 1(X) SP HSC
radar video is of fundamental importance. TUNE
WARNING: GAIN
RAIN
Especially in the case of heavy rain and/or a rough sea, it
SEA
is essential that the setting be adapted by trained
CLEAN SWP
personnel so that it is suitable for the situation. MEDIUM
In the following, there is a description of how to set the video of a radar IR
correctly on the master indicator. Only after these settings have been made VE
on the master indicator can activated slave indicators too be set in the same
way (parameters that cannot be set on slave indicators are pointed out).
1. Select the 12 NM display range.
2. Tuning (adjustment of the frequency) (can be set on the master indi- 1.MORE
cator only)
TUNE
WARNING: 2.DO
AFC
An optimum tuning is not only important for a clear visual
display of the targets on the video but is also a necessary
TUNE AFC
prerequisite for the ARPA functions.
Automatic tuning: With the MORE key, click into the TUNE field; then
click on AFC (Automatic Frequency Control).
☞ If two X-Band or two S-Band systems are being operated simulta-
neously, disturbance of automatic tuning might occur (if it is being
used). In such cases, manual tuning is appropriate.
Manual tuning: Click into the TUNE field. As a result, in addition
2.
a setting bar is displayed. With the trackball, set the display bar of
the TUNE indication to its maximum value and press the DO key. TX/RX 72 %
☞ In the case of manual tuning, the length of the bar in the TUNE 3.DO
TUNE field corresponds to the amplitude with which the input 1.DO
signal is available for signal processing. Observe more than or

one antenna rotation to find the maximum.
On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning the
TUNE knob. 1) TUNE
3. Gain (input amplification)

1.DO
Switch off the Clean Sweep function (see page 71). Click into the GAIN 2.
field, and increase the value with the trackball until slight noise is visible
GAIN 27 %
on the PPI. Then reduce the value a little until the noise has just disap-
3.DO
peared, but not more. Then press the DO key. Switch on the Clean
Sweep function again and, if necessary, increase the gain a little (up to or
100% for a favourable sea state).
☞ With the Clean Sweep function activated, the change in gain only
has an effect after several revolutions of the antenna. GAIN
☞ On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning the GAIN

knob. 1)
4. Select the desired display range.
1) If the automatic function is switched on, it is automatically switched off when the corresponding rotary knob is operated.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 69
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
5. Anticlutter Sea (sea clutter suppression)

With anticlutter sea, the input amplification at close range is reduced depending on the distance.
WARNING:
In the case of anticlutter sea values that are too large, weak targets can
be lost, especially at close range.
If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only
produce weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is
correct.
Manual suppression of sea clutter: Click into the SEA field and set
the value with the trackball so that the clutter caused by a rough sea
is as weak as possible but radar targets are still clearly visible. Then 1.DO 2.
press the DO key.
☞ If the Clean Sweep function is switched on, the radar requires
SEA 80 %
3.DO
several revolutions of the antenna in order to adjust itself to
changed anticlutter sea values. Therefore, any large changes or
should only be made slowly (step by step).
On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning the SEA
knob. 1) SEA
Automatic suppression of sea clutter: With the MORE key, click into 1.MORE
the SEA field, and then click on AUTO.
SEA
☞ The automatic anticlutter sea function has the advantage that the AUTO
2.DO
clutter values taken into account in the upwind direction are
different from those taken into account in the downwind direction.
To check the display of very small target-echoes, it is necessary SEA AUTO
to switch over to manual operation.
6. Anticlutter Rain (suppression of rain clutter)
WARNING:
In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if
the setting is correct, radar targets which only produce weak reflections
- especially targets situated behind a strong rain front - will remain unde-
tected. Such targets can appear suddenly when leaving the rainy area.
Manual suppression of rain clutter: Click into the RAIN field, and set 2. 1.DO
the value with the trackball so that the boundary of the rainy area is
clearly visible and the clutter in the region behind it is as weak as RAIN 20 %
possible. However, radar targets should still be clearly visible. Then 3.DO
press the DO key.
☞
or
If (on the open sea) there are no radar targets available, set the
rain clutter suppression function so that the boundary of the rainy
area is clearly visible and the clutter in the region behind it is as RAIN
weak as possible.
On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning the RAIN 1.MORE
knob. 1)
RAIN
Automatic suppression of rain clutter: With the MORE key, click AUTO
2.DO
into the RAIN field, and then click on AUTO.
RAIN AUTO
1) If the automatic function is switched on, it is automatically switched off when the corresponding rotary knob is operated.
70 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
☞ The automatic anticlutter rain function has the advantage that it takes place individually for
regions with widely differing precipitation.
To check the display of very small target-echoes, it is necessary to switch over to manual oper-
ation.
When the automatic anticlutter rain function is switched on, the Clean Sweep mode HIGH is
activated. As soon as a different Clean Sweep mode is selected, the automatic anticlutter rain
function is deactivated.
7. Clean Sweep
In addition to the anticlutter sea and anticlutter rain settings already described, individual adaptation
to the various environmental conditions is possible with the aid of the Clean Sweep function.
When the Clean Sweep function is switched on, scan-to-scan correlation always takes place addi-
tionally. This performs a comparison between the sets of radar information from several revolutions
of the antenna, and suppresses non-correlating signals.
WARNING
When the Clean Sweep function is running, the scan-to-scan correlation
might have the result that small, fast-moving targets and that Racon
codes are displayed with reduced intensity or might be suppressed.
Switching the Clean Sweep function on and off: Click on the
CLEAN SWP
CLEAN SWP field. DO
OFF
LOW
Selecting the Clean Sweep mode: Click on the CLEAN SWP field
with the MORE key, and then click on the desired mode (with the DO
key). 1.MORE CLEAN SWP
☞ After changing the Clean Sweep setting, it might be necessary to
2.DO LOW
LOW
adjust the gain setting. MEDIUM

HIGH
An active automatic anticlutter rain function is deactivated when-
ever the LOW or MEDIUM mode is selected or when the Clean Sweep mode is switched off.
By means of the three available Clean Sweep modes, the video presentation can be improved to
suit the given situation:
LOW
Near your own ship 1), extremely small target-echoes (which would otherwise only be the size
of a single pixel) are enlarged to such an extent that, if observed carefully, they become visible.
Use:
- In harbours, fjords, canals, coastal areas and other voyage regions having large land
masses in the immediate vicinity
- On the open sea in good to medium weather conditions
MEDIUM
1. Echoes from targets which are situated near your own ship are displayed in more enlarged
form; see also page 158.
☞ If the echoes are too small, set the pulse length to LP.
2. An adaptive anticlutter sea function is switched on additionally (optimised for the display of
single targets). As a result of this function, the decluttering of regions with widely differing inten-
sities of sea clutter takes place individually.
Use: On the open sea in all weather conditions, particularly for fast vessels
1) Up to a distance of one third of the selected range
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 71
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
HIGH
Same as MEDIUM. Particularly good results in the case of long pulse operation.
Use: On the open sea in all weather conditions
WARNING
In the Clean Sweep mode HIGH, particularly small, fast-moving targets
are displayed with reduced intensity or might be suppressed.
8. Interference Rejection (IR) IR
Interference caused by other radars (see page 160) can usually be
DO
eliminated by switch-on of the interference rejection function. This func-
coloured
tion is switched on and off by clicking on the IR button. IR
9. Video Emphasis VE
Strong video signals can be accentuated optically by switching on the DO
Video Emphasis function. This function is switched on and off by coloured
VE
clicking on the VE button.
10. Pulse length
TX/RX 1(X) SP
After switch-over to a smaller display range, check whether a better
display is obtained by switching to a different pulse length. Switching is DO
done by clicking on the pulse length field (SP = Short Pulse, LP = Long
TX/RX 1(X) LP
Pulse) (see page 164).
11. Orientation values for settings on the open sea
Up to sea state 3 - 4, no rain
Gain 90% - 100%
Anticlutter sea 20%
Anticlutter rain 30%
Clean Sweep MEDIUM or HIGH
Interference rejection On
Pulse length SP
Up to sea state 3 - 4, rain medium to heavy
Gain 85% - 95%
Anticlutter sea 20%
Anticlutter rain 50% - 60%
Pulse length SP or LP
Sea state 6 - 9, with rain
Gain 80% - 90%
Anticlutter sea 30% - 50%
Anticlutter rain 40% - 50%
Pulse length LP
72 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 4.3 Selection of the Antenna Revolution Rate
4.3 Selection of the Antenna Revolution Rate
In order to increase the update rate of the radar video, the antenna grey = normal revolution rate
revolution rate can be doubled 1).
TX/RX 1(X) SP HSC
Switch-over is achieved by clicking on the HSC button (HSC = High
Speed Craft; "HSC on" = doubling of the antenna revolution rate).For DO
technical data see table on page 164.
TX/RX 1(X) SP HSC
☞ A disadvantage of the high revolution rate of the antenna is the
unavoidably higher rate of wear and tear on the antenna coloured = high revolution rat
gearbox.
4.4 Radar Setting for High Speed of Own Vessel (HSC)
1. Switch-on the high antenna revolution rate with the HSC button
2. To prevent blurring of the video, the mode "TM mode" and "North-Up" or "Course-Up" should be
switched on.
3. To reduce the risk of loss of target, the Clean Sweep function must be switched off. The risk of loss
of target is also increased by fast course-manoeuvres performed by own vessel.
4. Target tracking must already begin at long range. In this connection, it must be noted that the target
data are correspondingly less accurate - see D i s t o r t i o n s o f t h e R a d a r V i d e o on page 158.
4.5 Suppression of the Synthetics and Video
Suppression of Synthetics
DO
So that a video signal which has a synthetic image (e.g. a target symbol) super-
imposed on it on the PPI can be assessed more satisfactorily, the display of the SYNTH OFF
entire synthetics can be suppressed. This occurs for as long as the DO key is or
kept pressed in the SYNTH OFF button or on the SYNTH OFF key. SYNTH
OFF
Suppression of Video
DO
So that the synthetics can be recognised better in the case of superimposition of
video signals, the entire video display can be suppressed. This occurs for as VIDEO OFF
long as the DO key is kept pressed in the VIDEO OFF button or the VIDEO OFF or
VIDEO
key.
OFF
4.6 Display of Racon Codes and SART Detection
Please refer to chapter 19 for details.
1) If the appropriate antenna gearbox is installed. Switching over is possible if the HSC button is present.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 73
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
4.6 Display of Racon Codes and SART Detection Operating Instructions
74 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 5 Heading, Speed, Position
5 Heading, Speed, Position

◆ Function of the Sensor Master
◆ Synchronisation of the gyro compass (set gyro function)
◆ Selection of the speed sensor
◆ Specifying whether speed through the water (STW) or speed
over ground (SOG) is to be used
◆ Input for the Reference Target Speed mode
◆ Manual input of speed, drift and set
◆ Selection of the position sensor
◆ Manual correction of the position
◆ Sensor monitoring
CAUTION:
The right choice of navigation sensors, the right setting of the navigation
data and a continuous overview of the status of the selected navigation
sensors are very important for safe navigation.
5.1 Sensor Master
All available data of the navigation sensors enter the system via the interfaces of the radar indicators
(RADARPILOT, CHARTRADAR, MULTIPILOT). Redundant sensors are connected to various radar indi-
cators. All electronics units of the NACOS are connected to one another via data bus systems.
One of the radar indicators performs the tasks of the Sensor Master. There, all data of the navigation
sensors that are connected to the various radar indicators come together via the data bus system. The
Sensor Master is monitoring the navigation sensors selected by the operator.
The sensor monitoring described in Section 5.5 takes place there, as well as the computation of the addi-
tional or missing system (navigation) data, if possible. In the case of redundant sensors (e.g. various posi-
tion sensors, various logs), the operator defines the sensors that are to be used by the entire system.
Every selection of navigation data or navigation sensors that is made on any indicator of the system is
implemented by the Sensor Master.
The system data that is determined in this way is made available to all indicators of the system via a data
bus system.
At service level, it is specified which radar indicators can operate as Sensor Master. The program auto-
matically selects one of these indicators as the Sensor Master, for example the radar that was switched
on first. If the indicator that is defined as the Sensor Master fails, or if a connected item of equipment
detects errors in the data traffic that is taking place with that indicator, then another indicator automatically
takes over the function of the Sensor Master in order to restore the complete system functionality. The
alarm SENSOR MASTER CHANGED appears on the indicator that has become the new Sensor Master.
The switch-over to create the new Sensor Master can also be performed manually:
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 75
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
5 Heading, Speed, Position RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
5.2 Compass Operating Instructions
Display of the Sensor Master Status and Switch-Over 1.DO

MENU
Radar indicators which can perform the Sensor Master func-
tion have the button SENSOR MASTER in the UTILITIES
menu. By clicking on this button, the indicator is defined as the MENU
2.DO
Sensor Master. UTILITIES
In the case of the indicator which is the Sensor Master, this 3.DO SENSOR MASTER
button is coloured, but insensitive.
5.2 Compass
For the transfer of the heading information, a technique is often used which transfers heading changes
only, and not the absolute value. Therefore, in such cases, after switch-on of the radar system and after
failure of the signal transfer, the synchronism of the heading transfer process must be checked and, if
necessary, corrected.
Display of the Heading Value Used

DO
The heading value currently being transferred from the

compass and used in the entire radar system is displayed in the HDG 45.6 ° GYRO
HDG field.
Synchronisation of the Heading Transfer

1 2 3
Click on the HDG field and, with the virtual keyboard, enter the 4 5 6
value displayed by the gyro compass.
☞ If the ship is yawing, click on the OK button of the virtual keyboard when the heading displayed on
the compass has the same value as the value entered on the virtual keyboard.
If the course transfer takes place by means of a serial interface (e.g. according to IEC 61162), the
heading value cannot be changed.
5.3 Speed Sensor
There may be several speed sensors connected to the radar system. One of them has to be chosen. In
the case of speed sensors which transfer the longitudinal speed only, the drift and set can be entered
manually. As an alternative to selection of a speed sensor, it is also possible to input the speed manually,
if necessary. If fixed ARPA targets are available, the speed can be determined by Reference Target
Tracking.
☞ The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also the
speed and course made good. Compared to the present-day state of the art, they generally do not
meet the IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment).
Therefore, they might not be configured in the system, and so it might not be possible to select them
for speed input.
Display of the Speed Data Used

In the SPD line, the speed data used in the system are SPD 19.3 kn BT LOG1
displayed: longitudinal speed, Bottom Track / Water Track
status, and the selected sensor.
76 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 5.3 Speed Sensor
☞ If the longitudinal speed is computed taking account of data that are entered manually (e.g. set and
drift), the value has a yellow background.
Selection of the Speed Sensor

1.DO
1. Click on the speed sensor field. The list of speed sensors
appears. 1) SPD 19.3 kn BT LOG1
MAN
2. Preselect the desired sensor by clicking. The data trans- 2.DO
GPS1
ferred from this sensor are then displayed in the Multidis- GPS2
LOG1
play. 2) LOG2
3. Check the sensor data for plausibility. REF TGT
3.(check)
Check the supplementary values which might be suggested
by the system (depending on the type of sensor prese- GPS2
SPEED
lected - see below). 3)
VALID VALUE
4. The sensor is selected by clicking on the SELECT button.
☞ If a different sensor is to be preselected, this can be
DGPS ONLY
COG 317.4 °
done in the Multidisplay after clicking on the displayed
SOG 19.1 kn
sensor.
☞ By clicking on the CANCEL button, the sensor previ- SELECT CANCEL
ously selected remains selected; values entered in the 4.DO
Multidisplay are not taken over.
Settings Depending on the Sensor Type
Dual-axis Logs, e.g. SAM 4683 SPEED LOG1

The longitudinal speed measured is displayed behind SPD , BOTTOM TRACK
and the transverse speed measured is displayed behind WT BT
SPD . The triangles point in the direction of movement. If the SPD 19.2 kn 18.9 kn
speeds are measured both through the water and over ground, SPD 1.50 kn 1.23 kn
these data are also displayed.
If WT data (speed through the water) and BT data (speed over ground) are both available at the same
time, the data whose field is marked in colour are used. Switching over is done by clicking on the WT or
BT field.
If WT data are in use (sea stabilization), the speed through water does only reflect the leeway produced
by the wind (not the current).
1)
If there are several sensors of the same type connected to the system, they are each given a sequential number in addition to the statement
of sensor type.
2)
The display indicating whether the speed displayed is over ground or through the water depends on the sensor:
- COG/SOG or SPD + BOTTOM TRACK = speed over ground
- SPD + WATER TRACK = speed through the water.
3)
The supplementary values suggested are computed by the system in such a way that, when they are taken over, no change occurs in the
longitudinal and transverse speeds.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 77
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
5.3 Speed Sensor Operating Instructions
Single-Axis Logs, e.g. Consilium R1 (a)

SPEED LOG2
The longitudinal speed measured by the preselected log is
displayed behind SPEED. WATER TRACK
The SET and DRIFT values displayed as a suggestion have SPEED 19.2 kn
been selected such that, together with the longitudinal speed SET 300.0 ° DRIFT 1.50 kn
measured by the preselected log, the same speed vector is 2.DO 1.DO
obtained as the one used previously.
Manual input takes place after clicking on the DRIFT or SET
1 2 3 1 2 3
field with the virtual keyboard. 4 5 6 4 5 6
IMPORTANT
If it is required to use the original speed data without set and drift, the
drift value must be set to zero.
☞ If a drift value (not equal to zero) is entered, the log, as soon as it is selected, is interpreted as being
in Bottom Track mode. If the previously selected sensor measured the speed through the water (two-
axis log in WT mode), the values must be corrected to take account of the effect of the existing
current.
☞ Check continuously the correctness of the used drift values to avoid a wrong speed vector being
displayed and used by the system.
Sensors which Determine the Speed from Position Data, e.g. GPS, Reference Target Tracking
The status transferred from the sensor is displayed.
SPEED DGPS
The measured course over ground is displayed behind COG,
and the measured speed over ground is displayed behind SOG. VALID VALUE
DO*
If a DGPS receiver is selected, it can be specified whether the DGPS ONLY
received speed is only to be used when the receiver is operating COG 317.4 °
in Differential mode: SOG 19.1 kn
If the speed data of a DGPS receiver operating in GPS *Usability of DGPS ONLY button can be
mode (i.e. if Differential mode is not possible) are not to be restricted on service level !
used, the function DGPS ONLY must be switched on. 1)
If the speed data are to be used even when the Differential mode has failed, the function DGPS
ONLY must be switched off. 1)
Manual Input of Speed (MAN)

SPEED MAN
Behind SPEED, the longitudinal speed currently known to the
system (from the speed sensor selected previously) is entered; VALID VALUE
if necessary, change the value with the virtual keyboard after
SPEED 19.2 kn
clicking on the SPEED field.
SET 300.0 ° DRIFT 1.50 kn
For the set and drift, the same applies as for the single-axis log
- see above.
1) As a result, the optional DGPS ONLY button situated in the display of the position sensor data is also switched over.
78 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 5.4 Position Sensor and Reference Selection
5.4 Position Sensor and Reference Selection
There are often several position sensors connected to the system. One of them has to be selected. As
an alternative to selecting a position sensor, it can - if necessary - also be specified that the system posi-
tion is to be determined on the radar by dead reckoning (EP = Estimated Position) using the gyro heading
and the speed data of the selected speed sensor.
After the position sensor has been selected, the accuracy of the position data must be checked continu-
ously. Constant errors in the transferred position can be compensated manually.
General Remarks about Position Data

On the radar, it is basically necessary to distinguish between the following positions:
1. The position of the Consistent common reference point: The display is shown in the position
display when the cursor is situated outside the PPI. "Consistent common reference point" is defined
as a location on the own ship to which all measurements such as target range, relative course, rela-
tive speed, own ship position are referred. Usually the Conning Position on the bridge, alternatively
the position of the radar antenna of the transceiver being operated.
2. Reference position for bearings and other data: All displays relating to own position (own ship
symbol, VRM/EBL, range/bearing of the cursor position, CPA/TCPA) refer to the selected
consistent common reference point (conning or radar). This is made clear in the position display
by the entry REF CON or REF RADAR.
3. Cursor position: The display is shown in the position display when the cursor is situated within the
PPI. This display indicates the absolute geographical position at the cursor and the bearing and
range to the selected CCRP.
All LAT/LON values are based on the geodetic datum "WGS 84".
☞ Important: Only position receivers may be connected to the radar system that output the position
values in the geographical reference system WGS 84 via an interface as per IEC 61162-1 1).
Selection of the Reference DO
Click on the reference field behind REF. The selected

reference change from CON to RADAR or vice versa. POS GPS1 REF CON
LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
☞ The shown LAT/LON data represent the position of LON 008:36.437 W SOG 18.3 kn
the selected reference. The Radar position is marked – ––– –
ADJUST – – – – –
by a cross if the own ship symbol (see page 46) is
visible.
☞ If another reference than the Conning Position is in POS GPS1 REF RADAR
use, the reference indicator has a yellow background, LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
indicating that the radar antenna is used as the refer- LON 008:36.437 W SOG 18.3 kn
ence instead of the default Conning Position. ADJUST – ––– – – ––– –
☞ If the radar antenna is used as the reference and the

display is in the off-center mode, it may happen that the reference position is displayed outside
the PPI, when changing the reference to CON. In this case VRM and EBL origin and parts of
the own ship symbol are situated outside the PPI and the bearing scale is shown incompletely.
This can be avioded by a new selection of the off-center position.
1) IEC 61162-1 largely corresponds to NMEA 0183.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 79
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
5.4 Position Sensor and Reference Selection Operating Instructions
Display of the Position Data Used

In the position display, the position data used in the system are
displayed: POS GPS1 REF RADAR
- Behind POS: the selected position sensor. LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
- Behind LAT and LON: the own ship position. 1) LON 008:36.437 W SOG18.3 kn
- Behind REF: the selected reference CON or RADAR ADJUST – – – – – – ––– –
- Behind COG and SOG: the values of course and speed
over ground calculated for the selected reference1) that are
transferred from the position sensor.
- Behind ADJUST: the value of the manual position-correction in metres N/S and W/E,
☞ If a manual position-correction has been entered, the LAT and LON values have a yellow back-
ground.
Selection of the Position Sensor 1.DO
1. Click on the position sensor field. The list of the connected

position sensors appears. 2) POS GPS1 REF CON
LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
2. Preselect the desired sensor by clicking. The position LON 008:36.437 W SOG 18.3 kn
received from this sensor, manually corrected if necessary ADJUST – – – – – – ––– –
(for correction of a constant position-error, see page 82), is
then displayed in the Multidisplay.
3. Furthermore, the bearing (BRG) and range (RNG) to the EP
INS
position determined by the sensor that has been called up GPS1
2.DO
are displayed in the Multidisplay. GPS2
Check whether the values displayed are plausible. 3.(check)
4. By clicking on the SELECT button, the sensor is selected.

POSITION GPS2
☞ If a different sensor is to be preselected, this can be
VALID VALUE
done in the Multidisplay after clicking on the displayed
sensor. DGPS ONLY
☞ By clicking on the CANCEL button, the sensor previ- LAT 55:35.085 N BRG 180 °
ously selected remains selected. LON 008:36.437 W RNG 0.20 NM
SELECT CANCEL
4.DO
*Usability of DGPS ONLY button can be

restricted on service level !
(See also page 81)
1) Data of the selected CCRP

2)
If there are several sensors of the same type connected to the system, they are each given a sequential number in addition to the statement
of sensor type.
80 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Using Dead Reckoning to Determine the Position

If there is no position sensor available, or if the data from the position sensor are invalid or faulty, the
only remaining possibility of determining the position is the dead reckoning method, using the gyro
heading, the data from the selected speed sensor, and the drift value if such a value is entered.
WARNING:
The accuracy of the dead-reckoned position (shownin the positon
display as: EP) must be checked continually. For safety reasons, an
available position-sensor must be selected as soon as possible.
☞ If EP position is used in combination with a water stabilized speed sensor input or a single axis log,
the calculated EP position is of poor accuracy.
The dead reckoning process is switched on in the same way as the selection of a position sensor - see
above. During this process, the "position sensor" EP (= Estimated Position) must be selected. The special
feature is that, if EP is preselected, the starting position displayed in the Multidisplay can be changed.
The dead reckoning process begins with this position after pressing of the SELECT button.
Specifying the Use of the GPS Mode

The DGPS ON button is only available if configured on service level.
In the case that a DGPS receiver is selected, it can optionally 1a.DO
be specified whether the received position is only to be used
when the receiver is operating in Differential mode. POS GPS1REF CON
1. By clicking of the position sensor field, display the position LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
sensor data. LON 008:36.437 W SOG 18.3 kn
ADJUST – ––– – – ––– –
2. If the position data of a DGPS receiver operating in GPS
mode (i.e. if Differential mode is not possible) are not to be
used, the function DGPS ONLY must be switched on. 1)
POSITION GPS1
If the position data are to be used even when the Differen-
tial mode has failed, the function DGPS ONLY must be VALID VALUE
switched off. 2.DO*
DGPS ONLY
DGPS ONLY
LAT 55:35.085 N BRG 180 °
*Usability55:35.085
LAT N BRG
of DGPS ONLY 180
button can be °
Check of the Accuracy of the Position Data
restricted on service level !
In the PPI, any inaccuracy in the position data causes displace-
ment between
- the own ship symbol and the radar video on the one hand, and
- the tracks, the charts and the maps on the other hand.
The position used by the system is normally accurate enough if the symbols of the chart (or the symbols
of a map that may have been generated for this purpose) coincide with the videos of the radar targets
when the display range is set to a small value.
1) As a result, the optional DGPS ONLY button situated in the speed sensor data is also switched over.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 81
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Correction of a Constant Position-Error (Position Offset)

If the displayed position is incorrect, the videos of fixed point-targets (e.g. buoys) do not coincide with the
chart symbols of these targets (or the symbols that are entered at the correct positions in a map). The
position error is corrected manually by making the video of a fixed target coincide with its chart/map
symbol:
1. Switch on a sufficiently small radar range.
2. Click on the ADJUST button. By flashing, the button indi- POS GPS1 REF CON
cates that the cursor in the PPI now has a special function. LAT 55:35.285 N COG 51.6 °
LON 008:36.437 W SOG 18.3 NM
3. Click on a map symbol whose radar echo is clearly recog-
ADJUST – ––– – – ––– –
nisable and identifiable.
DO
If the cursor is now moved, the distances of the cursor
position from the clicked symbol in the north/south and
east/west directions are displayed behind the ADJUST button. Furthermore, the direction and
distance of the cursor position (as seen from the clicked position) are shown at the cursor.
4. Click on the radar echo of the map symbol on which you have clicked. As a result, the correction
values displayed behind the ADJUST button (= position offset) take effect and is added to the posi-
tion of the sensor.
☞ The entire track and map synthetics move by an amount equal to the position offset. The posi-
tion offset that is entered continues to be displayed behind ADJUST. 1)
☞ In this way, each direction can be corrected by up to 999 m.1)
5. Check that the other symbols of the map too now coincide as well as possible with their radar
echoes. If necessary, processes 2 to 4 can be repeated on the basis of the position offset that exists
at that time.
☞ If the entire video has a rotational displacement relative to the chart or map, this indicates that
there is probably a compass error. Either the synchronisation with the compass system is inad-
equate (this must then be corrected – see page 76) or the compass system itself has a static
or dynamic course error. This should, if possible, be corrected in the compass system.
Deleting the Position Offset 1.MORE
The position offset is deleted automatically as soon as a

different position-sensor is selected. ADJUST 135 N 368 E m
2.DO
RESET ADJUST
The position offset is deleted manually by clicking on the
ADJUST button with the MORE key and by then clicking
RESET ADJUST with the DO key.
ADJUST ––– – ––– – m
1) If the EP position is being used, the position data are modified by an amount equal to the position offset. No limitation takes place.
82 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 5.5 Sensor Monitoring
5.5 Sensor Monitoring
Optionally, the heading, speed and position of the selected sensors can be automatically monitored by
making a comparison with the corresponding data of redundant sensors. If a limit value is exceeded, an
alarm appears. You can specify whether the monitoring is to take place and how high the alarm limit
value is to be, and for heading and speed you can choose between several comparison sensors. For
position monitoring, it is also possible to decide whether the limit value is to be automatically adapted to
suit the sensor types that are being monitored.
The settings are made in the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog. Limit
This Dialog appears in the Multidisplay when, in the Monitoring mode
ALARMS menu, the SENSOR MONITOR button is clicked. Existing difference
Comparison sensor
Alternative for opening the Dialog: Click on the horn Monitored
symbol with MORE and then (with DO) on SENSOR sensor
MONITOR (see page 125).
SENSOR MONITOR DIFF LIMIT
Possible Monitoring Functions
Line 1 HDG MAG 7,4 M 30.0 °
Up to seven monitoring functions can take place simultane- Line 2 HDG COG DGPS 2.3 M 10.0 °
ously 1). For each monitoring function, the data are summa- Line 3 HDG COG INS1 2.5 M 10.0 °
rised in a line in the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog. Line 4 SPD BT LOG1 1.6 M 5.0 kn
Line 5 SPD SOG DGPS 0.8 M 3.0 kn
Line 1:Comparison of the heading between gyro and magnetic Line 6 SPD SOG INS1 0.9 O kn
compass
Line 7 POS INS1 35 M 500 m
Line 2:Comparison between heading of the gyro and COG of the CLOSE
selected position sensor 2)
Line 3:Comparison between heading of the gyro and COG of the

redundant position sensor
Line 4:Comparison of the speed between the selected speed sensor and the redundant 3) speed sensor
Line 5:Comparison between speed of the selected speed sensor and SOG of the selected position sensor2 )
Line 6:Comparison between speed of the selected speed sensor and SOG of the redundant position sensor2 )
Line 7:Comparison of position between the selected position sensor and the redundant3 ) position sensor2 )
Switching the Monitoring On and Off

1DO
Each monitoring function can be switched on (MANUAL or
HDG COG DGPS 2.3 O °
AUTO 4)) and switched OFF after clicking of the monitoring mode OFF
2.DO
field. MANUAL
☞ The fact that a monitoring function is switched off can be
recognised not only from the O (=OFF) in the monitoring mode
field but also from the fact that no limit is displayed and that
the appropriate field is not highlighted green.
1) A necessary prerequisite for this is not only that the necessary sensors are installed but also that the individual monitoring possibility is
switched on at service level.
2) If DGPS ONLY is available and switched on by the operator, only GPS receivers working in DGPS mode can be used as the comparison
sensor.
3) If there are several redundant sensors available, the best one is selected automatically.
4) AUTO for position monitoring only
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 83
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
5.5 Sensor Monitoring Operating Instructions
Entering the Limit Value DO
For each monitoring function that is switched on, a limit can be

HDG COG DGPS 2.3 M 10.0 °
entered after clicking of the LIMIT field.
☞ The value that is entered last is stored, and re-appears if the
monitoring function is switched off and then on again. 1 2 3
4 5 6
Behaviour if the Limit is Exceeded

Each monitoring function generates an individual monitoring alarm if the limit is exceeded. These alarms
all end with ... DIFFER: MAGNETIC HEADING DIFFER, COG OF SEL. POSITION DIFFER and so on.
After pressing of the ACK button, the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog appears. There, the monitored sensors
and the comparison sensor for which a monitoring alarm occurs appear in red. To prevent the alarm from
appearing again, as soon as the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog is closed the cause of the alarm must be
eliminated (by raising the limit, or by switching the monitoring function off, or by selecting a different
sensor).
Failure of a Sensor which is being Monitored

Each monitoring function generates an individual monitoring alarm as soon as the signals of the sensor
used for monitoring are no longer available. They all end with ... LOST: MAGNETIC HEADING LOST,
COG OF SEL. POSITION LOST, and so on. As far as alarm acknowledgement is concerned, the same
remarks apply as for exceeding of the limit (remedy by selecting a different sensor, or by switching off
the monitoring function).
Taking Account of Drift and ROT in the HDG / COG Monitoring

If the speed is reduced and there is a drift, the difference between the heading of the gyro and the COG
of the position sensor (drift angle) increases.
If there are large ROT values, COG of the position sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro,
and this too causes an increase in the difference that is being monitored.
So that these two effects will not trigger any false alarms, only part of the actual difference between HDG
and COG is displayed and used as a criterion for the alarm output in these cases. The difference is then
displayed on a yellow background. If the ROT is very high 1) and if the speeds are very low 1), HDG /
COG monitoring does not occur.
Automatic Specifying of the Position Monitoring Limit

1DO
For position monitoring, AUTO mode too can be selected after
POS INS1 35 M 500 m
clicking of the monitoring mode field. OFF
MANUAL
In AUTO mode, the limit is automatically adapted to suit the types 2.DO
AUTO
of position sensors that are being compared.
1) These limit values can be set at service level.
84 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 6 Bearing and Range
Operating Instructions 6.1 Cursor Display
6 Bearing and Range

◆ Measurement of bearing and range with the cursor display
◆ Measurement of range with the variable range marker (VRM)
◆ Measurement of bearing by means of the electronic bearing
lines (EBL's)
◆ Parallel indexing by means of parallel index lines (PI)
6.1 Cursor Display
The bearing and range of an object with respect to own ship can
most easily and quickly be read off on the cursor display: T CURS REF CON
LAT 55:35.285 N BRG 51.6 °
As soon as the cursor is situated in the PPI, the cursor position
LON 008:36.437 W RNG 18.3 NM
instead of the own ship position is shown in the position display.
ADJUST – – – – – – ––– –
T CURS (instead of POS) then appears in the position display.
Behind BRG (= bearing), the true bearing of the cursor position with respect to own ship is displayed, and
behind RNG (= range) the distance from own ship's position to the cursor position is displayed 1).
☞ If the gyro compass fails, the relative bearing is displayed behind BRG. This is indicated by the fact
that, instead of T CURS (T = true), the text R CURS (R = relative) appears in the heading of the
cursor display.
The manually-entered correction value which is taken into account in the displayed position of the cursor
(see page 82) is displayed behind ADJUST.
☞ The sailing time to the cursor position (TTG) and the time of arrival at the cursor position (ETA) are
displayed in the Quick Info box - see page 155.
6.2 Variable Range Markers (VRM)
The radar has two VRM, which can be adjusted independently of one another. With these markers, the
distance from own ship1) or (in conjunction with the EBL) the distance between two objects can be meas-
ured.
Switching the VRM On and Off VRM

A VRM that is switched on can be recognised from the fact that the distance 2.00 NM
is displayed in the VRM field. A VRM that is switched off is indicated by the DO
word OFF in the VRM field. VRM
OFF
The display of the VRM is switched on and off by clicking on the desired
VRM field.
☞ If the display range is reduced when the VRM is in the switched-on state, the VRM might be situated
outside the visible range. If you switch the VRM off and then on again, it returns to the visible range.
1)
REF = CON indicates that BRG and RNG are measured from the conning position, REF = RADAR indicates measurement from the
selected radar antenna.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 85
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
6 Bearing and Range RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
6.3 Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL) Operating Instructions
Setting the Distance

Click on the VRM graphics in the PPI, drag it to the desired distance (e.g. to the object whose range is
to be measured). The VRM is fixed by clicking again.
Operating by Means of the Keyboard

With the keyboard, only one of the two VRM's can be operated at any given time. EBL
The operating procedure is the same for both VRM's. The triangle in front of the 1 122.7 °
EBL field indicates the VRM whose keyboard operating function is currently 2 OFF
switched on.
For example, if the keyboard operating function is currently switched on for VRM
VRM1 VRM2
1, VRM 1 is switched on and off with the key VRM1 and is adjusted with the VRM
OFF OFF
knob. With the key VRM2, the keyboard operating function is switched over to
VRM 2.
VRM
6.3 Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL)
The radar has two EBL’s, which can be adjusted independently of one another. With these EBL's, the
bearing of an object with respect to own ship or the bearing between two objects can be determined.
Switching the EBL On and Off EBL

An EBL that is switched on can be recognised from the fact that the 1 122.7 ° T CENT
bearing is displayed in the left-hand EBL field. An EBL that is switched DO
off is indicated by the word OFF in that EBL field. EBL
1 OFF T CENT
The display of the EBL is switched on and off by clicking on the desired
EBL field.
Setting the Origin of the EBL

For the bearing with respect to own ship: CENT
2.DO
Select CENT in the right-hand EBL field 1). ABS
EBL REL
For the bearing between two objects: 1 122.7 ° T CENT
To set the EBL origin to a different position, in the PPI click on the EBL 1.DO
origin and position it at the desired place by clicking.
In the right-hand EBL field, select ABS if the EBL origin is to be at a fixed position, or select REL if the
EBL origin is to move along together with own ship.
☞ The EBL remains intact even if the origin is situated outside the PPI. Switching on and off resets the
origin of the EBL to your own ship.
Setting the Bearing

Click on the EBL graphics in the PPI, set the desired direction, and fix it by clicking.
1)
REF = CON / RADAR: The bearing of the centered EBL is taken from the reference position indicated behind REF in the position sensor
display.
86 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 6.3 Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL)
Displaying the Relative Bearing

PPI Orientation North-Up and Course-Up:
1 122.7 ° R CENT
The values displayed are true bearings. This fact is indicated in the
middle EBL field by the letter T (= true). For as long as the DO key is DO
kept pressed in this field, the relative bearing is displayed (indicated by 1 72.7 ° T CENT
R = relative).
☞ If the compass signal fails, the display is automatically switched over to relative bearing (R).
PPI Orientation Head-Up:
The values displayed are relative bearings. For as long as the DO key is kept pressed in this field, the
true bearing is displayed.

With the keyboard, only one of the two EBL's can be operated at any given time. EBL
The operating procedure is the same for both EBL's. The triangle in front of the 1 122.7 °
EBL field indicates the EBL whose keyboard operating function is currently 2 OFF
switched on.
For example, if the keyboard operating function is currently switched on for EBL 1,
EBL1 EBL2
EBL 1 is switched on and off with the key EBL1 and is adjusted with the EBL knob.
OFF OFF
With the key EBL2, the keyboard operating function is switched over to EBL 2.
☞ The setting of the EBL origin and the display of the relative bearing can be
performed only by means of an operating procedure on the display. EBL
USEFUL INFORMATION
Latitude-Dependent Errors in the Display of the EBL

With the type of projection used for the longitude/latitude grid in the radar, the parallels of latitude become
more strongly curved with increasing latitude, while the meridians converge increasingly with increasing
distance from the equator (i.e. the direction of a meridian at the edge of the PPI is not 0° - 180° but might
be 358° - 182° ); in other words, their directions no longer correspond to the degree scale at the edge of
the PPI.
In contrast to this, the EBL is always displayed as a straight line; its bearing displayed as an EBL value
has an error.
The following table shows the maximum errors for the various latitudes and range settings.
Distance of EBL from Geographical Latitude
Own Ship
20 ° 40 ° 60 ° 80 °
10 NM < 0.1 ° 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.9 °
20 NM 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.6 ° 1.9 °
40 NM 0.2 ° 0.5 ° 1.2 ° 3.8 °
60 NM 0.4 ° 0.8 ° 1.7 ° 5.7 °
80 NM 0.5 ° 1.1 ° 2.3 ° 7.5 °
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 87
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
6.4 Operating the VRM and the EBL Jointly Operating Instructions
6.4 Operating the VRM and the EBL Jointly
If the EBL origin is set to CENT, then after clicking on the point
of intersection of VRM1 and EBL1 or of VRM2 and EBL2, both
elements are moved jointly. EBL VRM
1 122.7 ° T CENT 2.00 NM
2 OFF T ABS OFF
Measuring the Range and Bearing between Two Objects
If the EBL1 origin is set to ABS or REL, a marker is displayed on
EBL1 such that the distance of this marker from the EBL1 origin
is equal to the value of VRM1. If you click on this marker, both
VRM1 and EBL1 are changed by means of the cursor.
The same applies to EBL2 and VRM2.
☞ By means of this procedure, the range and bearing between two objects can be measured: set the
EBL origin on object 1 and drag the marker to object 2.
6.5 Measurement Lines
Two measurement lines using the same colour as VRM/EBL are

2.38NM
available which are operated in the same way but independently 33.1°
of each other. They can be used as an alternative to VRM/EBL in
order to determine in a simple way the bearing and range
Length and direction
between any objects situated in the PPI. of measurement line;
direction as seen
Handling the Measurement Lines from beginning of line
All information given here for measurement line 1 is also appli- Beginning of line
cable to measurement line 2.
Setting the Measurement Line

1. Click into the PPI by means of MORE, and in the context 1.MORE PPI
menu which then opens up click on SET LINE 1.
2.DO
2. Click on the position from which the measurement is to be SET LINE 1
performed. A line is now drawn between the clicked point and SET LINE 2
the cursor position. Close to the cursor position, the bearing
and range from the clicked point to the cursor position are
displayed.
3. By clicking a second time, the line, including the numerical values, is fixed.
☞ If, between processes 1 to 3, the cursor remains stationary for too long a time, the process of
setting the measurement line is interrupted.
The measurement line remains fixed at the position that is set, i.e. it also moves out of the PPI. It cannot
be changed but can only be deleted and set again.
Modifying the Measurement Line

Click on the end of the measurement line and then, click on the new position.
By clicking on the origin, the origin becomes the end of the line and vice versa.
88 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 6.6 Parallel Index Lines
Deleting the Measurement Line

Click into the PPI by means of MORE, and in the context menu 1.MORE PPI
which then opens up click on CLEAR LINE 1.
☞ By the setting of measurement line 1, the button SET LINE 2.DO
CLEAR LINE 1
1 becomes the button CLEAR LINE 1; by deletion of line 1, SET LINE 2
it becomes SET LINE 1 again.
6.6 Parallel Index Lines
There are four parallel index lines available, which can be adjusted individually.
Switching Parallel Index Lines On and Off

PI T PI T PI T
The parallel index lines can be switched on and off individually by DO
clicking on their number displayed below PI but also together in one 1 1 1
2 MORE
step by using the more function. MORE 2 2
☞ When you switch the parallel index lines on, they appear in the
3 3 3
4
4 4
form in which they were set last. If the display range has been
reduced in the meantime, they might be situated outside the
visible range.
Resetting all PIs

PI T PI T PI T
The parallel index lines can be reset to default setting. DO
1 1 1
Click on PI and in the more context menu on RESET.
2 2 2
3 MORE 3 3
Changing the Distance of a Parallel Index Line 4 4 4
Click on the parallel index line near the closest point of approach to
own ship, drag it to the desired distance, and click again.
Changing the Bearing of a Parallel Index Line

Click on the parallel index line near the compass rose, drag it into the desired direction, and click it again.
Displaying Values of a Parallel Index Line

While the parallel index line is being operated on the PPI, its data
INDEX LINE 1
appear in an separate display:
RANGE 11.5 NM
INDEX LINE Number of the index line BEARING 125.8 ° T
305.8 ° T
RANGE Distance from own ship (at the closest point of
approach) 1)
BEARING Bearings (direction and opposite direction) of the index
line
1)
REF = CON indicates that RANGE are measured from the conning position, REF = RADAR indicates measurement from the selected radar
antenna.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 89
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
6.6 Parallel Index Lines Operating Instructions
Switching the Bearing Display of the Parallel Index Lines to Rela- DO

tive or True PI T PI R
The display of the bearings of the parallel index lines can be switched 1 1
over between true bearing (indicated by T) and relative bearing (indi- 2 2
cated by R).
The switch-over is performed by clicking on the indication T or R.
☞ If the compass signal fails, the display is automatically switched to
relative bearing (R).
Selection of the Parallel Index Line that is to be Operated

PI
Click on the PI key once or several times until the triangle is positioned beside OFF
the parallel index line that is to be operated. EBL VRM
Switching On and Off the Display of Parallel Index Lines

By pressing the PI key for a longer time, the display of the selected parallel index line is switched on and
off.
Moving a Parallel Index Line

The distance of the parallel index line is set with the VRM knob, and its direction is set with the EBL knob.
90 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling
Operating Instructions 6.6 Parallel Index Lines
7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling

◆ Symbols used
◆ Acquisition, tracking and deletion of AIS and ARPA targets
◆ Target data display
◆ Target IDs
◆ Reference target tracking
◆ Calculation principles for relative/true ARPA data
◆ ARPA malfunctions
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 91
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
7.1 Symbols Used Operating Instructions
7.1 Symbols Used
Targets that have been acquired and are being tracked are provided with symbols indicating their track
status. Targets being tracked can also be provided with speed vectors and with a past position plot as
per Section 3.6 (see page 46).
ARPA Targets AIS Targets
Sleeping Target
The point of the triangle is aligned with the
heading of the target, or with its COG if
heading information is not available. Dashed
symbol: Because of missing data, no colli-
Target acquired manually sion avoidance computation can be
performed - see page 98. A sleeping target
with neither a reported heading nor COG will
be orientated toward the top of the opera-
tional display area.
Target acquired automatically Target acquired automatically by acquisi-
by acquisition/guard zone tion/guard zone
(Target which has triggered the (Target which has triggered the
TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) flashing TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) alarm or the flashing
alarm or the TGT ENTERED TGT ENTERED GUARZONE (n) alarm)
GUARZONE (n) alarm)
Tracked Target
Target (moving) being tracked The triangle becomes greater than the
sleeping target, additionally it is possible to
show the true scaled outlines.
If the heading information is available, the
heading line is displayed additionally, and if
the target is turning then a flag on the
heading indicator shows the direction of turn.
Dashed symbol: See sleeping target
Target with ID
4
Target with ID BXGHE
If the target is transmitting a call sign, this is
taken. If not, the system generates the ID
Target with label as reference AIS with a serial number. AIS7
target
(reference target tracking) R
Dangerous target 1) flashing, Dangerous target 1) flashing,

Target which has triggered the red Target which has triggered the red
DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm
Target whose data are being

displayed Target whose data are being displayed
(symbol and ID are displayed (symbol and ID are displayed additionally)
additionally)
Lost target Lost target
Target which has triggered the flashing Target which has triggered the LOST flashing
LOST TARGET (n) alarm. TARGET (n) alarm.
(xx=target ID yy.y=range, (xx=target ID yy.y=range, zzz=true
zzz=true bearing) bearing)
1)
If the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm is acknowledged by the operator, the symbol stops flashing but is still drawn in red.
Displaying the target symbols with shades

For a better recognition (visibility) of the symbol graphics on the radar video the target symbols can be
displayed with a shade in a different colour.
See DISPLAY SETTINGS, SYMBOL... menu on page 34 The Menu Structure
92 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.2 Procedure of the Target Acquisition and Tracking Overview
7.2 Procedure of the Target Acquisition and Tracking Overview
For the targets, the AIS electronics unit and the ARPA electronics of the radar are two independent
sensors whose displays and operating procedures take place on one and the same radar indicator.
The AIS electronics unit supplies the radar indicator with the data received from the AIS targets. With
these data, sleeping target symbols are generated, which can together be made visible if necessary 1).
The sleeping targets of the AIS can be acquired as the target videos of the radar. This can be done
manually after clicking on a sleeping target or the target video (page 96) or automatically with the aid of
one of the two combined acquisition and surveillance zones, called acquisition/guard zone in the
following (page 97). For the acquisition/guard zone setting procedure, see page 125. Furthermore, a
sleeping target is acquired automatically when the TCPA and CPA values fall below the set values (page
99).
Acquired radar targets are tracked by the ARPA electronics. The data of these ARPA targets are deter-
mined by the ARPA electronics and can be displayed at any time (page 101).
Acquired AIS targets are treated in exactly the same way; a lot more data are available about AIS targets
than about ARPA targets (page 103).
If a ship has been acquired both as a ARPA target and as an AIS target, it may only appear as an AIS
or ARPA target if both target data are matching (page 97).
The radar permits manual and automatic acquisition of up to 40 targets of each type (ARPA, AIS).
Acquired targets are tracked automatically.
When the automatic tracking begins, the radar determines the movement of the target.
- The symbol or appears.
- If the vectors are switched on, also the speed vector is now displayed, the computation of collision
risks is performed continuously, and the past position plot is built up.
- The complete target data set can be observed on the TARGET DATA display see (page 102).
In the case of manual ARPA target acquisition, the target video is marked manually, and is thus initially
provided with the broken Circle . The radar then checks during the next three revolutions of the
antenna to determine whether the echo occurs twice at this position. If it does, this target is tracked auto-
matically by the radar. If it does not, the radar does not recognise any target at this position, and the
LOST TARGET (n) alarm occurs. The target just acquired but lost is marked with the flashing symbol
.
☞ Automatic target acquisition is switched on and off together with the display of the acquisition/guard
zone - see page 99. The procedure for setting the acquisition / guard zone is described on page 99.
☞ If there are already 40 targets being tracked and another target is then acquired, the ACQUI-
SATION ZONE OVERFLOW alarm appears. In this case, at least one non-critical target must first
be deleted.
☞ The number of ARPA and AIS targets being tracked should be kept as small as possible; the pres-
ence of too many targets causes confusion on the screen and distracts the operator's attention from
what is really important. Targets that are no longer relevant should be deleted.
☞ In the case of tracked targets entering a clutter area (rain or sea clutter), a "target swap" might occur;
parts of the rain front are suddenly being "tracked". A target swap can also occur if there are targets
situated close together or close to land. In the case of target swaps, no warning is given.
1) The radar indicator can simultaneously process the data of up to 400 AIS targets (the 400 closest sleeping targets are displayed).
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 93
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.2 Procedure of the Target Acquisition and Tracking Overview Operating Instructions
WARNING:
Automatic target acquisition and tracking are ensured only if the radar
video is OK, i.e. if it is adjusted in the same way as would also be neces-
sary for visual evaluation.
WARNING:
Under particularly unfavourable meteorological conditions, it can
happen even with an optimum setting of the radar that targets in the
radar video cannot be detected automatically.
94 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.3 Manual AIS and ARPA Target Acquisition
7.3 Manual AIS and ARPA Target Acquisition
Targets cannot be acquired manually unless they are visible on the PPI. For the AIS, this means that the
sleeping target that is to be acquired must first be made visible:
Switching the Display of the Sleeping Targets On and Off

By clicking on the AIS button, the display of the sleeping targets can be AIS
switched on and off.
DO
If the AIS button has a coloured background, all sleeping targets which are coloured
AIS
present in the geographic region of the PPI and whose data are being
received are displayed.
The system permits manual and automatic acquisition of up to 40 ARPA
and AIS targets. For automatic target acquisition, see 7.4
Acquiring a Target Manually

1. Click on the ACQ TGT button (= Acquire Target); the button flashes. DO
2. Acquire the target video or the sleeping target symbol by clicking. For
ACQ TGT
as long as the ACQ TGT button is flashing, more targets can be
acquired in the same way.
☞ When the 38th 1) target is acquired, an indication appears, stating that only another two targets
can be acquired. After the 40th target has been acquired, an indication appears, stating that no
more targets can be acquired. Now at the latest, uncritical or uninteresting targets should be
deleted.
3. The acquisition function of the cursor is switched off by clicking into the PPI with the MORE key or
by clicking again (with the DO key) on the ACQ TGT button.
Using the keyboard: Move the cursor to the target video or the sleeping
ACQ
AIS target, and press the ACQ TGT key. TGT
If, with procedure 2, a target video is acquired, the ARPA electronics
performs the following routine: First of all, the target video is marked with a broken circle . During
the next three revolutions of the antenna, a check is performed to determine whether the echo occurs
twice at this position. If it does, the echo is recognised as an ARPA target, and is acquired. If it does not,
the ARPA electronics does not recognise any target at this position, the LOST TARGET (n) alarm occurs,
and the supposed non-acquired target is now marked with the flashing symbol .
If, with procedure 2, a sleeping target has been acquired, acquisition takes place without any further
check.
Target
Using the MORE context menu: Click on the target video with the 1.MORE video
MORE key, and then click on ACQUIRE TARGET (ARPA) (with
the DO key).
SET LINE 1
SET LINE 2
OFF CENTER
2.DO
ACQUIRE TARGET (ARPA)
1) For ARPA targets and AIS targets the target counter is independent (40+40=80 targets can be acquired)
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 95
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.3 Manual AIS and ARPA Target Acquisition Operating Instructions
Selective Acquisition of an ARPA or AIS Target

If a sleeping target is clicked with MORE, in the context menu
can be selected by clicking ACQUIRE TARGET (ARPA) or 1.MORE
ACQUIRE TARGET (AIS) whether the ARPA target or the

AIS target shall be acquired.
SET LINE 1
SET LINE 2
OFF CENTER
2.DO SHOW AIS DATA
Show / Hide TRUE SCALED OUTLINE SHOW TRUE SCALED OUTLINE
or
HIDE TRUE SCALED OUTLINE
In case that the AIS target delivers the ship dimensions, it is ACQUIRE TARGET (ARPA)
possible to show/hide the true scaled outlines together with ACQUIRE TARGET (AIS)
SEND SAFETY MESSAGE
the AIS symbol. This is only possible if the selected target
SHOW AIS WITH PRIORITY
reports the heading information and the beam of the target SHOW ARPA WITH PRIORITY
symbol in the PPI exceeds 7.5 mm.
Determine the priority for ARPA or AIS presentation

It is possible to define temporarily for the selected target the priority for showing the ARPA or AIS target
symbol and target data in case that the defined target merging limits are fulfilled. The limits required for
this are set in the AIS... Dialog AIS TGT MANAGEMENT.
The selective priority setting for a single target may be overwritten by the priority setting for all targets.See
page 34.
☞ The temporary change of the priority takes effect in the target data display as well as in the
graphical display (PPI) for approximately 3 to 4 antenna revolutions.
96 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition
AIS/ARPA Target Merging

An ARPA target and a AIS symbol may represent the same object. In order to determine if this is the fact,
ARPA and AIS data for distance, speed and course are compared. If the difference in data are within pre-
set limits, the targets will be merged if the merging function is activated. In this case, only one of the
symbols is shown. Anyway, both targets will be tracked. The blanked-out symbol will appear again auto-
matically if the differences in data exceed the pre-set limits.
The limits required for this are set in the AIS TGT MANAGEMENT
AIS TGT MANAGEMENT
Dialog: Click on the MENU button, and then click on AIS..., then on
the AIS TGT MANAGEMENT button. MERGING LIMITS
DISTANCE 0.1NM
There, the currently valid values are shown under MERGING LIMITS COURSE 10.0 °
and can be changed after clicking. SPEED 1.0 kn
To activate the Target Merging function press on the MERGING TARGET CAPACITY
LIMITS button. SLEEPING 5 % USED
ACTIVATED 25 % USED
It is possible to define the priority for showing ARPA or AIS targets:
Click on the MENU button and then click on AIS and activate or CLOSE
deactivate the priority for showing AIS targets by pressing with the
DO button on AIS TARGET PRIORITY. See page 34.
Meanings:
DISTANCE: Distance between ARPA target and AIS target
COURSE: The course difference between the two targets 1)
SPEED: The speed difference between the two targets
As long as all three values lie below the defined limits, the display of the ARPA or AIS target
is omitted.
The percentage of the maximum number of tracked sleeping AIS targets. Up to 400
SLEEPING ... USED: sleeping targets can be tracked.
The percentage of the maximum number of tracked activated AIS targets. Up to 40 acti-
ACTIVATED ... USED: vated targets can be tracked.
1)
Evaluated by comparison of data delivered by ARPA and those delivered by AIS
7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition
Automatic Acquisition of AIS Targets by Collision Avoidance Computation

Sleeping AIS targets becoming dangerous can be acquired automatically.
ARPA targets and sleeping AIS targets can also be acquired automatically by means of an acquisition or
guard zone.
If the TCPA and CPA values of a sleeping target 1) fall below the values that were set according to page
99, that target is automatically acquired. In this case
- the DANGEROUS TARGET alarm appears,
- the target which has caused the alarm is indicated on the PPI by means of the flashing symbol
,
- the TARGET DATA display is automatically switched on with this target at the first place, the ID field
is red, and the symbol on the PPI is marked with the target ID.
If there are already 40 AIS targets being tracked the DANGEROUS TGT ACQ FAILED alarm appears
instead. In this case, at least one non-critical target must first be deleted.
1)
It’s true that SAR aircraft are displayed as AIS targets, but they are recognized as SAR aircraft. No automatic acquisition takes place for
them.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 97
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition Operating Instructions
Prerequisites for the Collision Avoidance Computation in the Case of AIS Targets
The collision avoidance computation can be performed only if the relative speed between own ship and
the target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (SOG, COG) transmitted
from the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over ground is
mainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor 1); otherwise, it is determined
with the aid of the SOG/COG of the selected position sensor.
If an AIS target is not transmitting SOG and COG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for this
target. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, no
DANGEROUS TARGET alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous approach. The symbol of this AIS
target is dashed.
If, because of missing data or caused by sensor selection, the own speed vector over ground cannot be
determined, then for all AIS targets the collision avoidance computation and the DANGEROUS TARGET
alarm do not take place. The symbols of all AIS targets are then dashed. Three minutes after the occur-
rence of this situation, the AIS NO CPA ALARM, SOG LOST alarm appears.
Switching Off the Automatic Acquisition of AIS Targets

With the DANGEROUS TARGETS button, automatic acquisi-
tion by collision avoidance computation can be switched on and
off not only for ARPA targets but also for AIS targets. TARGET ALARMS
In particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets

from being acquired by the collision avoidance computation, for DANGEROUS TARGETS
example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths TCPA LIMIT 15 min
caused by AIS targets. CPA LIMIT 0.5 NM
DO
AUTO AIS TGT ACQ
This takes place in the TARGET ALARMS Dialog by means of

the AUTO AIS TGT ACQ button. This Dialog appears in the Multidisplay if, in the ALARMS menu, the
TARGET ALARMS button is clicked.
☞ The automatic AIS target acquisition takes place only when the collision avoidance computation is
in the switched-on state (DANGEROUS TARGETS button is green).
Automatic Acquisition by Means of Acquisition/Guard Zone

In the case of automatic target acquisition, the radar evaluates all radar echoes appearing in the acqui-
sition/guard zones.
If the echo appears at a certain position at least six times during ten revolutions of the antenna, it is eval-
uated as an ARPA target. If the echoes do not belong to a target already being tracked, the position is
treated as an acquired target and is marked with the flashing symbol . The TARGET AUTO-
ACQUIRED (n) alarm appears, or - if the target was already being tracked when it entered the acquisi-
tion/guard zone - the TGT ENTERED GUARDZONE (n) alarm appears. After acknowledgement of the
alarm, the automatic target tracking begins.
ARPA: The ARPA electronics evaluates all radar echoes appearing in the switched-on acquisition/guard
zones. If the echo appears at a certain position at least six times during ten revolutions of the
antenna, it is evaluated as a radar target. If the echoes do not belong to a target already being
tracked, this radar target is acquired as an ARPA target.
AIS: If a sleeping target enters the region of a switched-on acquisition/guard zone, it is acquired automat-
ically.
1) which is displayed on the speed display
98 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition
If an AIS target has been acquired by the acquisition/guard zone,

- it is marked with the flashing symbol or if the function TRUE SCALED TARGETS is active the
AIS target can be shown with the true scaled outlines see page 34.
- the TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) alarm appears, or - if the target was already being tracked
when it entered the acquisition/guard zone - the TGT ENTERED GUARDZONE (n) alarm appears.
☞ This automatic target acquisition is switched on and off together with the display of the acquisition/
guard zone - see page 125. The procedure for setting the acquisition/guard zone is described on
page 125.
If there are already 40 ARPA targets or 40 AIS targets being tracked or acquired, the ACQUISITION
ZONE OVERFLOW alarm appears. In this case, at least one non-critical target must first be deleted
before another target can be acquired.
Switching the Acquisition/Guard Zone On and Off

The acquisition/guard zone is switched on and off by clicking
on the button ZONE 1 or ZONE 2. TARGET ALARMS
ACQUISITION / GUARD ZONES
☞ If the acquisition/guard zone is switched off, automatic ZONE 1 ZONE 2
target acquisition does not take place. Targets already
acquired continue to be tracked. DO or DO
Setting the Range of the Acquisition/Guard Zone

1 NM DO DO
Click on the inner or outer limit of the acquisition/guard zone,
drag the zone to the desired size, and press the DO key. Changes the range
☞ The outer limit can be set to a value between 1.5 NM and

20 NM.
DO
Setting the Angle of the Acquisition/Guard Zone Changes the angle
Click near a side limit into the acquisition/guard zone, drag the
zone to the desired angle, and press the DO key.
☞ The angle can be set to a value between 5° and 360° . The setting takes place relative to the
heading direction, i.e. the acquisition/guard zone turns with the ship’s heading.
Collision Avoidance (TCPA, CPA)

For TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) and CPA (Closest Point of Approach), limits can be set
such that, if the actual values fall short of these limits, the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm will appear.
If the danger computation is switched on, the radar computes the TCPA and CPA values for all ARPA
targets being tracked, for all sleeping AIS targets 1) and for all tracked AIS targets 2). If these values fall
short of the set limits,
- the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm appears,
- the target which has caused the alarm is indicated on the PPI by means of the flashing symbol
or ; if a sleeping target has caused the alarm, that target is automatically acquired before-
hand,
- the TARGET DATA display is automatically switched on with this target at the first place, the ID field
is red, and the symbol is marked with the target ID.
1) For special features and limitations in the case of AIS targets, see page 97
2) Not for SAR aircraft.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 99
b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.5 Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target Operating Instructions
7.5 Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target
An ARPA target is tracked automatically until

- it is deleted manually or
- it leaves the target tracking range of 20 NM or
- it is lost within the target tracking range of 20 NM.
An ARPA target is lost if, during five revolutions of the antenna, no correlation of the video can be found
by the radar, or the detection probability falls below 50%.
An AIS target is tracked automatically until
- it is deleted manually or
- it is lost.
A tracked AIS target is lost if the AIS electronics unit does not receive any more signals from that target
within the specified time.
If an ARPA target is lost within a distance of 19.5 NM 1), or if an AIS target is lost within a distance of
16 NM 1), a LOST TARGET (n) alarm appears and the symbol of the lost target changes its shape and
flashes until the alarm is acknowledged.
Deletion of a Target
Click on the target with the MORE key, and then click on DELETE TARGET (with the DO key).
☞ If an AIS target being tracked in the background as an ARPA target is deleted (see A I S / A R P A T a r g e t
M e r g i n g on page 97), the ARPA symbol re-appears. If this too is to be deleted, the process must be
repeated.
1.MORE
1.MORE
SET LINE 1 or SET LINE 1

SET LINE 2 SET LINE 2
OFF CENTER OFF CENTER
Page 101 SHOW TARGET DATA
Page 101 SHOW TARGET DATA
Page 103 SHOW AIS DATA
Page 106 SHOW ID
2.DO DELETE TARGET Page 113 SEND SAFETY MESSAGE
Page 107 SELECT REFERENCE TARGET Page 106 SHOW ID
Page 151 ZOOM FIXED ON TARGET 2.DO DELETE TARGET
Page151 ZOOM FIXED ON TARGET
1) Can be changed at service level; minimum value is 10 NM.
100 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.6 Target Data Display
Deleting Several Targets 1.MORE
1. With the MORE key, click on the ACQ TGT button. Then, with the ACQ TGT
2.DO
DO key, click on DELETE TARGETS. The ACQ TGT button DELETE TARGETS
becomes the DEL TGT button, and it flashes. Merged AIS/ARPA DELETE ALL TARGETS
targets see above.
2. Delete the target by clicking. As long as the DEL TGT button is
DEL TGT
flashing, other targets can be deleted in the same way. Flashing
3. The deletion function of the cursor is switched off by clicking into
the PPI with the MORE key or by clicking again (with the DO key) on the DEL TGT button.
Deletion of All Targets 1.MORE
Click on the ACQ TGT button with the MORE key, and then click on ACQ TGT
DELETE ALL TARGETS (with the DO key). DELETE TARGETS
2.DO
DELETE ALL TARGETS
In this case, both the AIS targets and the ARPA targets are deleted.
7.6 Target Data Display
Unless stated otherwise, all of the following statements are applicable for all tracked AIS targets and
tracked ARPA targets.
At the bottom of the side strip, either all available ARPA data or the corresponding AIS data can be
displayed for two targets, or several pairs of these data can be displayed for eight targets.
Switching the Target Data Display On, Selecting the Targets

When you click on a target, this switches the TARGET DATA display
1.DO or
on. The data of the clicked target are displayed in the mode that was
set last (see below). The target is given the symbol and its target
ID (see page 106) is displayed. Furthermore, the TARGET DATA
display appears sorted by the TCPA when a target becomes a
dangerous target (smallest TCPA at first position largest TCPA at last
position). The TARGET DATA list will be sorted in another sequence
only if there is a new incoming dangerous target.
If you click on more targets, the data of each of them appear in the display. In all cases, the data of the
last selected targets are displayed.
or
1.MORE
Using the MORE context menu: Click on the target with the MORE
key, and then click on SHOW TARGET DATA (with the DO key). 2.DO
SHOW TARGET DATA
Switching Off the Target Data Display of Individual Targets

2.DO or
When you click on a target which is marked with the symbol , this
switches off the display of its data.
When you click on the last target whose data are being displayed, this switches off the TARGET DATA
display.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 101

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.6 Target Data Display Operating Instructions
or
Using the MORE context menu: Click on the target with the MORE 1.MORE
key, and then click on HIDE TARGET DATA (with the DO key).
2.DO
HIDE TARGET DATA
Switch-Over of the Display

The two versions of the TARGET DATA display - 8 Targets display and 2 Targets display - can be
selected after clicking on the hidden OTHER button situated in the lower area of the side strip.
☞ The functional principles of the hidden OTHER button are described on page 23.
The occurrence of a new dangerous target automatically opens the 2 Targets display sorted by the
TCPA.
2 Targets Display
The following data of the selected 2 (max) targets are displayed:
ID (= identifier) The target ID
BRG (= bearing) The bearing of the target TARGET DATA
ID FGIHG 13
RNG (= range) The range of the target
BRG 57.9 21.1 °
CSE (= course); RNG 2.01 3.50 NM
with prefix T (= true): course over ground / through T CSE 217.6 190.0 °
the water; T SPD 21.1 19.8 kn
with prefix R (= relative): course relative to your own TCPA 4:29 14:20 min
ship CPA 0.13 1.78 NM
SPD (= speed); BCT 4:09 6:34 min
with prefix T (= true): speed over ground / through BCR 0.20 0.46 NM
the water;
with prefix R (= relative): speed relative to your own
ship
☞ Whether true or relative values are displayed for SPD and CSE depends on the selected display of
the speed vectors and past position plots.
TCPA (= time to closest point of approach) The time up until the closest point of approach
CPA (= closest point of approach) The distance at the closest point of approach
BCT (= bow crossing time) The time that will pass before the target crosses the heading line of your
own ship
BCR (= bow crossing range) The range of the point on own ship's heading line at which the target
will cross that line. Negative value: Target crosses the stern line behind own ship.
102 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.7 Additional AIS Target Data
8 Targets Display
TARGET DATA
In the 8 Targets display, two parameters can be displayed for ID CPA TCPA
each of the eight targets that were called up last:
FGRUHZ 6.79 NM 10:03 min
CPA and TCPA, AIS13 2.27 NM 4:28 min
SIRIUS 12.59 NM 25:33 min
BRG and RNG or
1 3.67 NM 8:15 min
CSE and SPD. DRTS 0.479 NM 4:28 min
Switching over is performed by clicking on the button
Determination of the Data (see also page 108)

RNG, BRG, relative SPD and relative CSE are determined directly by the radar from the observed motion
and the relative position. The true SPD and true CSE are calculated by use of the data received from the
selected speed sensor.
Exception: In the case of true display of the AIS targets, the speed and course values received by the
AIS electronics unit are displayed.
Depending on the reference selection REF = CON / RADAR in the position display all relative data except
BCT and BCR are referencing the bow of the own ship.
Assuming that the course and speed of the target and of own ship will continue to have the values
displayed, the TCPA, CPA, BCT and BCR are computed by the radar. Insofar as the own speed is
needed for the calculations, the indicator uses the values shown in the speed display.
7.7 Additional AIS Target Data
The target data received by the AIS electronics unit can be

displayed in the Multidisplay: MORE
or
Displaying Additional Data of an Tracked AIS Target SHOW AIS DATA

DO
With the MORE key, click the desired (tracked) AIS target and
select SHOW AIS DATA. In the Multidisplay, the AIS OBJECT
DATA Dialog IDENTIFICATION then appears, with the data of
AIS OBJECT DATA
the clicked target: TARGET ID AHDNU
TARGET ID: The target ID used on the PPI; the target is a IDENTIFICATION
ship. or SAR ID: The target ID used on the PPI; the target MMSI 213722815
is a SAR aircraft. NAME MS BREMERHAVEN
MMSI: Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definite identifica- CALL SIGN AHDNU
tion of the AIS system (and hence of the target)
NAME: Name of the target
CALL SIGN: The call sign of the target SEND SAFETY MESSAGE
☞ By clicking on the button SEND SAFETY MESSAGE, the MORE CLOSE

AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog is opened. From that
With the MORE button the other AIS OBJECT
Dialog, a safety message can be sent to this target - see DATA Dialogs can be opened
page 113.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 103

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.7 Additional AIS Target Data Operating Instructions
After clicking on IDENTIFICATION or MORE, the other AIS OBJECT DATA Dialogs can be opened:
IDENTIFICATION
NAVIGATION DATA
see below SHIP DATA
AIS OBJECT DATA

DO or MORE TARGET ID AHDNU
IDENTIFICATION
Dialog NAVIGATION DATA:

The following data have been determined dynamically AIS OBJECT DATA
aboard the target ship: 1) TARGET ID AHDNU
LAT, LON Position of the target 2) NAVIGATION DATA
LAT 54:11.000 N
COG Course over ground of the target
LON 012:08.575 E
SOG Speed over ground of the target BRG 56.9 ° HDG 230.0 °
HDG Heading of the target RNG 12.6 NM ROT 0 °/min
ROT Rate of turn of the target 3) COG 231.2 ° BCT 12:00 min
SOG 22.3 kn BCR 15.0 NM
The following data have been computed by your own T/CPA 5:00 min 1.5 NM
radar 4): CLOSE
MORE
BRG Bearing of the target
RNG Range of the target
With the MORE button the other AIS
BCT Time that will pass before the target crosses the OBJECT DATA Dialogs can be opened
heading line of your own ship
BCR Range of the point on own ship's heading line at which the target will cross that line.
Negative value: Target crosses the stern line behind own ship.
T/CPA Time up until the closest point of approach and distance at the closest point of approach
These data are also displayed for an SAR aircraft, with the exception of HDG and ROT. Additional
display:
ALT Flight altitude of the SAR aircraft.
Dialog SHIP DATA:
Here, the static target-data, some of which were entered by AIS OBJECT DATA
TARGET ID AHDNU
the crew of the target, are displayed. For details, see SHIP DATA
Section 10.1, in which the procedure for entering the rele- DEST HAMBURG
vant data into your own system is described. ETA Jan 19 12:34 UTC
TYPE CARGO SHIP
HAZARDOUS GOODS CATEGORY A
STATE UNDER WAY
LENGTH 180 m
DRAUGHT 8m
MORE CLOSE

OBJECT DATA Dialogs can be opened
1)
The data received last are displayed. The update rate depends on the speed and ROT of the target. It lies between 2 seconds (>23 kn
without course change or >14 kn with course change) and 10 seconds (<14 kn without course change). When the ship is lying at anchor,
a transmission occurs every 3 minutes.
2) Updated by the radar during the pauses in reception.
3)
ROT: > = turning to starboard; < = turning to port
If the rate of turn is not being determined with a type-approved ROT sensor, then 0°/min is displayed here up to a ROT of 10°/min, and
for larger rates of turn the display indicates TURN STBD or TURN PORT.
4) Updated by the radar during the pauses in reception.
104 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.7 Additional AIS Target Data
Displaying Data of a Sleeping Target DO MORE

or
Click the desired sleeping target symbol. In the Multidisplay, the
AIS OBJECT DATA Dialog then appears, together with the
clicked target's data provided by the AIS electronics unit.
DO
SHOW AIS DATA
Using the MORE context menu in the PPI: Click on the
sleeping target symbol with the MORE key, and then click on the
DISPLAY AIS TARGET button (with the DO key). AIS OBJECT DATA
TARGET ID AHTFG
IDENTIFICATION
MMSI
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 105

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.8 Target IDs Operating Instructions
7.8 Target IDs
Every ARPA and AIS target being tracked is automatically given an identification number from 1 to 40.
This target ID can be displayed at the target symbol in the PPI. In the case of AIS targets, the number is
automatically prefixed by the letters AIS. As soon as the AIS electronics unit also receives the call sign
of the target, that call sign is used as the target ID. Instead of the number, it is also possible to use an
individual text with up to 6 characters.
You can select whether the target ID is to be displayed automatically for new targets. Furthermore, it is
possible to specify for each individual target whether the target ID is to be displayed.
Regardless of this setting, the target ID appears at the target symbol in the PPI as soon as its target data
are displayed in the side strip.
☞ The allocation of the number cannot be influenced. The program ensures that no number is allocated
twice.
Switching the Display of the Target ID On and Off

2.DO MENU
The display of the target ID for targets that are to be acquired is DISPLAY SETTINGS
switched on and off by clicking on the TARGET ID button in the 3.DO
DISPLAY SETTINGS menu. TARGET ID
Switching the Display of the Target ID of a Target On and Off

Switching on: Click on the target with the MORE key, and then
click on SHOW ID (with the DO key). 1.MORE 1.MORE
Switching off: Click on the target with the MORE key, and then
click on HIDE ID (with the DO key). 2.DO
SHOW ID
Inputting a Text as a Target ID

1.MORE
In the TARGET DATA display, click on the ID and enter the text
with the virtual keyboard. ID CPA TCPA
☞ If the text is to be deleted again, after clicking on the ID click AIS9 6.79 NM 10:03 min
on the Enter button of the virtual keyboard.
‘ 1 2 3
Tab q w e
106 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 7.9 Reference Target Tracking
7.9 Reference Target Tracking
If at least one fixed ARPA target 1) is selected as a reference target, the radar can determine own ship's
speed vector with the aid of this target's relative motion. By means of this "reference target tracking", the
radar also acts as a speed sensor, and can be called up as such under REFERENCE TARGET SPEED.
It is recommended to use more than one target for own speed and course calculation.
Selecting a reference target: Click on the fixed ARPA target
with the MORE key, and then click on SELECT REFERENCE 1.MORE
TARGET (with the DO key). 2.DO

SELECT REFERENCE TARGET
The first reference target is given an R as its target label. If
there is more than one reference target defined, all reference
targets are given an independent sequential number in addition
R
to the letter R.
Cancelling the selection: Click on the reference target with the MORE key, and then click on DESE-
LECT REFERENCE TARGET (with the DO key).
☞ Up to five reference targets can be selected.
☞ The speed input "reference target tracking" is treated as a ground stabilized speed sensor (speed
over ground), displayed as COG/SOG data, but is never used for calculation of relative course and
speed of AIS targets (according to the IMO rules).
☞ The loss of a tracked reference target trigger the LOST TARGET (n) alarm.
If the last reference target is lost, a new speed sensor must be selected see Section 5.3.
If no new speed sensor is selected in time, the SPEED INVALID alarm is triggered for the selection
of another speed sensor by the operator.
CAUTION: During reference target tracking, it shall be checked repeat-
edly if the selected reference targets are still displayed as fixed targets.
Loss of a tracked reference target may reduce the accuracy of the eval-
uated own speed and course, whereby the true data of tracked targets
may be deteriorated.
1)
If a moving target is selected by mistake, the own speed determined will be may incorrect. To ensure accurate determination of speed,
several fixed targets should be checked as references. AIS targets cannot be selected as reference targets.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 107

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
7.10 Calculation principles for relative / true target data Operating Instructions
7.10 Calculation principles for relative / true target data
As mentioned in the chapters before, the calculation principles for relative or true data have some impor-
tant differences:
The relative data are calculated directly by the ARPA. The ARPA uses the plots of consecutive antenna
scans in order to calculate relative course and speed of the target. Out of this, CPA and TCPA can be
calculated.
In order to calculate true data of a target, the own ship´s course and speed must be known. The accuracy
of the true data calculation depends on the accuracy of the sensors from which the own ship´s course
and speed are provided.
CAUTION: If there is any doubt that the own ship´s speed data are not correct, use the REL target
data and PPI presentation for collision avoidance purposes!
7.11 ARPA Malfunctions
There are a couple of possible reasons for which the ARPA cannot compute the target data correctly:
In case that the GYRO-SYSTEM is faulty, the radar goes immediately into the Head-Up mode. All display
objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer shown or
are inactive. If the gyro failure is not corrected within 30 seconds, all tracked targets are deleted also.
The additional reasons for the malfunction of the ARPA calculation are listed below.
Possible system faults:
1. azimuth fault (error 4010) 1)
2. video interrupt timeout (error 4011)1)
Possible alarm messages:

1. GYRO FAULT
2. MAGNETRON FAULT
3. NO HEADMAERKER
4. NO TRIGGER
5. NO ANTENNA AZIMUTH
6. NO RADAR VIDEO
7. TRANSCIEVER OFFLINE
For further information regarding the alarms please refer to chapter 23.
The integrated ARPA function test permits periodical checking of the ARPA´s performance features. See
page 217 ARPA Function Test.
1) for details see Technical Manual "Display Electronics Unit" chapter "System Fault Code List"
108 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 8 General Information about AIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 AIS Summarised Briefly
8 General Information about AIS

◆ The most important characteristics of the AIS
◆ Overview of Functions and Operating Procedures
8.1 AIS Summarised Briefly
In addition to the ARPA electronics, the Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System (AIS) auto-
matically provides the ship's nautical officers with important information about nearby vessels or other
relevant objects within VHF range.
The AIS system transmits own ship data cyclically via two defined VHF channels and receives the same
data of the other ships and objects that are equipped with AIS systems.
8.2 Overview of Functions and Operating Procedures
Targets and Other AIS Objects

With regard to the objects that can be detected by the AIS system and transferred to the radar indicator,
a distinction is drawn between the following:
- AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system
- SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue aeroplanes or helicopters
- Aids-to-Navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys
- Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control
centres
The AIS targets and SAR aircraft can be acquired and tracked, as well as the radar/ARPA targets; see
Section 9.
All AIS objects can be displayed on the PPI. The data of the individual displayed objects can be displayed
- see Section 7.7 (AIS targets and SAR aircraft) and Section 11 (Aids-to-Navigation and base stations).
Safety Messages and Long-Range Interrogation

Via AIS systems, safety messages 1) can be communicated if necessary, which are then passed on by all
receiving AIS systems as a message or an alarm to their display units. The procedures for dealing with
the safety messages received, and for transmitting your own safety messages, are described in Section .
The AIS system can also be interrogated about ship data via another system. Details of this are described
under L o n g - R a n g e I n t e r r o g a t i o n in Section 9.3.
1) Also called safety related messages in the relevant regulations.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 109

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
8 General Information about AIS RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
8.2 Overview of Functions and Operating Procedures Operating Instructions
Monitoring/Setting of the Own Ship Data Transmitted

Most of the information transmitted from your own AIS system is generated automatically by the
system. However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, hazardous cargo, destination, ETA)
have to be defined by the operator - see Section 10.1.
IMPORTANT:
Because these data are voyage-dependent, their updating should be
assured by including them in the navigational check list.
Setting of the communication technique (channel selection, bandwidth, transmission power etc.) usually
takes place fully automatically. In very rare cases, however, manual setting procedures too might be
necessary for this channel management process. For details, see Section 10.2.
Choice of Operating Unit

All operating actions can be performed on any radar indicator without the need for a particular switch-
over procedure. As far as the AIS settings and the information transmitted are concerned, the last oper-
ating action applies.
The Type of your Own AIS System

The interface between the AIS electronics unit and the display/operating unit (here, the radar systems) is
standardised, but it allows extensions. Therefore, although it is true that all types of AIS electronics units
meeting the relevant standards can be connected to the radar system, only the operation of the most
important functions is assured in all cases.
The following sections refer to radar indicators to which the Universal Automatic Identification System
UAIS DEBEG 3400 / AIS 3410 is connected. Which of the functions described is unavailable if a different
AIS system type is connected, depends on the type of the AIS system.
110 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 9 AIS Messages
Operating Instructions 9.1 Receiving Safety Messages
9 AIS Messages

◆ Displaying and managing received safety messages
◆ Generating and transmitting safety messages
◆ Handling of long-range interrogations
9.1 Receiving Safety Messages
New Safety Message

AIS SAFETY MESSAGE
When the AIS electronics unit receives a safety message, the MMSI 213722815 ID AHDNU
AIS NEW SAFETY MESSAGE alarm appears. By acknowl- LAT 54:11.000 N BRG 56.9 °
LON 012:08.575 E RNG 12.6 NM
edgement of the alarm, the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog
appears in the Multidisplay.
The identification data and position of the transmitting AIS (Message)
object are shown above the message. The received message
is enclosed in a frame.
With LIST ALL, the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE list containing the LIST ALL REPLY CLOSE
stored safety messages is opened.
With REPLY, the Dialog with which a message can be sent back is opened. The MMSI of the AIS system
from which the message was received is already entered in the Dialog. For further details, see page 113,
T r a n s m i t t i n g a M e s s a g e t o a P a r t i c u l a r A I S T a r g e t o r B a s e S t a t i o n , step 2.
Displaying Stored Safety Messages

As long as a received safety message has not been deleted, it
MENU
can be called up again for display: 1.DO
AIS
1. Click on the buttons MENU, AIS and SAFETY MESSAGE SAFETY MESSAGE
2.DO
READ, one after the other. READ...
In the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE list which then opens up,

all safety messages that have not yet been deleted are
listed: AIS SAFETY MESSAGE
MMSI NEW DATE

MMSI: AIS system number of the transmitting AIS
367275362 02:21 17.04.02
object 372894638 14:33 14.04.02
3.DO
217357394 * 12:46 06.04.02
NEW: Messages that have not yet been read are 217356283 09:14 05.04.02
provided with an asterisk *. 362737738 22:27 30.03.02
217357394 17:25 26.03.02
DATE: The time and date of reception 372894638 * 05:54 19.03.02
2. Mark the desired message by clicking. 4.DO
SHOW DELETE CLOSE
3. With SHOW, the message is displayed - see above, N e w
Safety Message.
☞ If, after closing with the CLOSE button, the alarm list continues to be displayed with the AIS NEW
SAFETY MESSAGE alarm, this means that several messages have been received before opening
of the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE list.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 111

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
9 AIS Messages RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
9.2 Transmitting Safety Messages Operating Instructions
Deleting Received Safety Messages

Forty safety messages can be stored in the system. When this number is reached and a further message
is then received, the oldest stored message is deleted and the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE LOST alarm
appears. So that a message that is worth keeping is not deleted in this way, and in order to avoid these
alarms, it is a good idea to delete messages that are not important.
This is done either with the DELETE button (situated in the AIS SAFETY DO
MESSAGE Dialog) for the message that is being displayed, or with the DELETE
DELETE button (situated in the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE list) for the
message that is marked there.
☞ As a result, the message is deleted in the system, i.e. it is no longer present on the other radar indi-
cators either. The marking of unread messages by means of asterisks is likewise valid throughout
the entire system.
9.2 Transmitting Safety Messages
If necessary, a safety message can be transmitted to AIS

MENU
targets and base stations. This can be a standardised distress 1.DO
AIS
message or a freely composed, individually entered text. The
SAFETY MESSAGE
message can be broadcast generally or transmitted to a partic- 2.DO
SEND...
ular AIS object.
Broadcasting a Distress Message Generally AIS SAFETY MESSAGE

MMSI ALL ID
1. Click on the buttons MENU, AIS and SAFETY MESSAGE 3.DO
SEND, one after the other. MSG TYPE NEW MSG
NEW MSG
2. If a distress message is to be transmitted: In the Multidis- USER MSG 1
play, click on the MSG TYPE field, and then click on the USER MSG 2
required message. USER MSG 3
USER MSG 4
The message is generated and displayed automatically. It USER MSG 5
contains the currently valid data of own ship. 1) FIRE, EXPLOSION
4.DO SENDCOLLISION
If a freely composed, individual text is to be transmitted: GROUNDING
See page 113, T r a n s m i t t i n g a M e s s a g e t o a P a r t i c u l a r A I S LISTING
SINKING
T a r g e t o r B a s e S t a t i o n , step 2. DISABLED / ADRIFT
3. When the message is to be broadcast generally, ALL must UNDESIGN.DISTRESS
ABANDONING SHIP
have been entered as the MMSI. If ALL is not already PIRACY ATTACK
entered there, this is achieved by clicking on the MMSI field EPIRB EMISSION
(clicking for a second time causes a return to the previous
entry).
(5.DO) AIS SAFETY MESSAGE
☞ This is necessary, for example, when the AIS SAFETY MMSI ALL ID
MESSAGE Dialog has been opened as described MSG TYPE GROUNDING
under T r a n s m i t t i n g a M e s s a g e t o a P a r t i c u l a r A I S GROUNDING
T a r g e t o r B a s e S t a t i o n - see below. LAT: 50:25.310 N
LON: 008:14.436 E
Time: Feb 14 04:31 UTC
4. After clicking on the SEND button, the message is trans- Call sign: HFOGT
mitted. Name: MV Havaria
MMSI: 376391637
With CLOSE, the Dialog is closed without transmission of
the message. 6.DO
SEND CLOSE
1) If necessary, it can be altered with the aid of the virtual keyboard after clicking.
112 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 9.2 Transmitting Safety Messages
Transmitting a Message to a Particular AIS Target or Base

1. MORE
Station or
or
1. Click on the desired AIS object with MORE, and select

SEND SAFETY MESSAGE.
AHDNU
Or, if information about the AIS object is needed
beforehand:
Click on the desired AIS object with MORE, and select SET LINE 1
SHOW AIS DATA in order to see the necessary data in SET LINE 2
the AIS OBJECT DATA Dialog IDENTIFICATION - see 2.DO
OFF CENTER
or SHOW AIS DATA
page 103. Then press the SEND SAFETY MESSAGE 2. DO
SEND SAFETY MESSAGE
button.
☞ The AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog which then
opens up in the Multidisplay already contains the
AIS OBJECT DATA
MMSI and ID of the clicked AIS object. TARGET ID AHDNU
IDENTIFICATION
Alternative: If the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog was
opened via the buttons MENU, AIS and SEND (see MMSI 213722815
above, B r o a d c a s t i n g a D i s t r e s s M e s s a g e G e n e r a l l y ), the NAME MS BREMERHAVEN
MMSI can be entered in the MMSI field in order to transmit CALL SIGN AHDNU
the message to that AIS object only. For this purpose, the
MMSI field must be clicked with MORE. 3.DO
SEND SAFETY MESSAGE
2. If a freely composed, individual text is to be transmitted, MORE CLOSE
the following possibilities exist:
a) Do not click on the MSG TYPE field (MSG TYPE is NEW With the MORE button the other AIS OBJECT
MSG); click into the empty message field and edit the new DATA Dialogs can be opened
message with the virtual keyboard.) 1)
AIS SAFETY MESSAGE
b) Click on the MSG TYPE field, and by selecting NEW MSG
MMSI 213722815 ID AHDNU
or USER MSG 1 ... 5 call up the message that was stored
last under the selected designation. MSG TYPE NEW MSG
4.DO
Each message can be altered with the aid of the virtual
keyboard after clicking. The message is stored during
transmission, and so also are the messages USER MSG
1 ... 5 if the Dialog is closed with CLOSE (without trans- 5.DO ‘ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mission). Tab q w e r t y u
SEND Caps a s CLOSE
d f g h
If a distress message is to be transmitted: Click on the Shift z x c v b n
MSG TYPE field, and click on the required message.
3. After clicking on the SEND button, the message is trans-
mitted.
With CLOSE, the Dialog is closed without transmission of the message.
☞ If the system recognises that the safety message has not been transmitted successfully, the AIS
SAFETY MSG TX FAILED alarm appears. If this is clicked with MORE before acknowledgement,
details are displayed.
☞ Regardless of whether the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog was opened in the manner described
here, or whether it was opened via the buttons MENU, AIS and SEND (see above, B r o a d c a s t i n g a
D i s t r e s s M e s s a g e G e n e r a l l y ), by entering the MMSI in the MMSI field you can specify the AIS object
to which the message is to be transmitted.
1)
The AIS does not allow the transmission of all characters that are usually present on the alphanumeric keyboard. The characters that
cannot be transmitted cannot be entered.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 113

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
9.3 Long-Range Interrogation Operating Instructions
9.3 Long-Range Interrogation
The AIS system can also be interrogated about own ship data (e.g. own AIS data 1)) by another system,
e.g. a SatCom system. Because this interrogation can take place over longer distances than the VHF
range, it is called "long-range interrogation".
The interrogating station specifies which data are requested. 2)
The reaction of the AIS electronics unit can be set by means of the reply mode.
The setting procedure for the reply mode takes place in the
AIS SETTINGS
AIS SETTINGS Dialog AIS CONTROL: Click on the MENU AIS CONTROL
button, and then, in the AIS menu, click on the AIS
SETTINGS button. As a result, the AIS SETTINGS Dialog Page 122 TRANSMITTER ON
AIS CONTROL opens up in the Multidisplay.
Page 121 LOW POWER MODE OFF
Opening the other AIS SETTINGS Dialogs: In the AIS
menu, click on the AIS SETTINGS button with MORE, then LONG RANGE INTERROGATION
click (with DO) on the desired Dialog. REPLY MODE AUTO
AIS CONTROL 2.DO
1.MORE
CHANNEL MANAGEMENT Page 119 MORE CLOSE
AIS SETTINGS
With the MORE button the other AIS OBJECT
DATA Dialogs can be opened
☞ If a AIS SETTINGS Dialog is already being displayed,
it is possible to switch over to the other AIS SETTINGS AIS SETTINGS
DO
Dialogs after clicking on the Dialog name or on the AIS CONTROL
MORE -button.
Setting of the Reply Mode 1.DO
In the AIS SETTINGS Dialog AIS CONTROL, click on the LONG RANGE INTERROGATION
REPLY MODE AUTO
buttons on the REPLY MODE field. The reply mode can be
OFF
selected: MANUAL
2.DO
OFF: No alarm appears, and no reply is sent. AUTO
MANUAL: In the case of an interrogation, the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears. By acknowl-
edgement, the AIS INTERROGATION Dialog appears in the Multidisplay (see below). There,
the reply is sent with the REPLY button or is instead prevented with the CLOSE button.
AUTO: In the case of an interrogation, the reply is sent automatically. For the purpose of information,
the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears; it should be acknowledged in the normal way.
1)
Own AIS data are the own ship data that are transmitted by own AIS electronics unit for the purpose of target data display on other ships;
see page 121.
2)
Such interrogations can take place from shore stations, e.g. from shipping companies, traffic control centres or governmental organisations,
but not from the AIS systems that are usually found on board.
114 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 9.3 Long-Range Interrogation
Displaying Incoming Interrogations

The ten interrogations that arrived last can be displayed at any
time: MENU
1.DO
AIS
1. Click on the buttons MENU, AIS and LONG RANGE
INTERROGATION READ, one after the other.
2.DO
In the AIS INTERROGATION list which then opens up in READ...
the Multidisplay, the ten interrogations that arrived last are
listed:
MMSI: Number of the AIS system from which the interro- AIS INTERROGATION
gation came. MMSI DATE
DATE: The date of interrogation. 215363728 R 14:21 08.04.02
215227663 R 09:33 08.04.02
☞ If a reply has been sent, there is an R before the
3.DO
216378262 R 23:26 07.04.02
346252166 R 21:41 07.04.02
date. 09:55 07.04.02
217337253
2. Mark the desired interrogation by clicking. 217353728 09:02 07.04.02
227357387 02:37 07.04.02
3. With SHOW, the AIS INTERROGATION Dialog is 4.DO
SHOW CLOSE
opened, and the marked interrogation is displayed:
Below the identification data of the interrogating station,
the items interrogated are listed in the frame. AIS INTERROGATION
4. If the reply has not yet been sent, the REPLY button is MMSI 216378262
NAME
sensitive. By clicking on the REPLY button, the reply is
sent. NAME/CALL SIGN/IMO NUMBER
DATE
With CLOSE, the Dialog is closed without transmission of POSITION
COG
the reply. DESTINATION/ETA
5.DO
With LIST ALL, the AIS INTERROGATION list is called
up again.
LIST ALL REPLY CLOSE
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 115

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
9.3 Long-Range Interrogation Operating Instructions
116 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 10 AIS Settings and Own AIS Data
Operating Instructions 10.1 Setting the Own AIS Data
10 AIS Settings and Own AIS Data

◆ Defining the own AIS data that are to be transmitted
depending on the voyage
◆ Automatic and manual setting of the AIS electronics unit
◆ Displaying the own AIS data and the AIS state
◆ Switching Off the transmit part of the AIS electronics unit
10.1 Setting the Own AIS Data
Most of the data that are sent by own AIS system for the purpose of target data display on other ships
(own AIS data) are generated automatically by the system (e.g. identification data, position etc., see
page 103). However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, cargo, destination, ETA) have to be
defined by the operator.
IMPORTANT:
The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage,
and must (if necessary) be updated during the voyage to ensure correct
and up-to-date information to be sent to other ships.
Specifying the Data that are to be Transmitted Depending on the Voyage

1. Click on the buttons MENU, AIS and SET VOYAGE
DATA, one after the other. MENU
1.DO
AIS
Or, using the MORE context menu: 2.DO
SET VOYAGE DATA...
Click on the own ship position with the MORE key and
then, click on SET AIS VOYAGE DATA (with the DO or
key. 1.MORE
2. In the AIS VOYAGE DATA Dialog which then opens

up in the Multidisplay, enter the data or correct them: 3.DO
SET AIS VOYAGE DATA
DEST: Destination of this voyage
ETA: Estimated time of arrival at the specified destina-
tion AIS VOYAGE DATA
DEST HAMBURG
DRAUGHT: The existing draught
3.DO ETA 12:34 25.01.2002 ZT
CARGO: Prescribed information about the cargo DRAUGHT 8.5 m
or 1) CARGO
TYPE: Prescribed information about the sub-type of HAZARDOUS GOODS CATEGORY A
ship STATE
UNDER WAY
STATE: Navigational state PERSONS ON BOARD 15
CLOSE
1)
Whether the CARGO or TYPE display field appears or whether this display field is missing and which entries are possible there depends
upon the ship type. Explanations for cargo entries HAZARDOUS GOODS CATEGORY A ... D see box on the next page.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 117

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
10 AIS Settings and Own AIS Data RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
10.1 Setting the Own AIS Data Operating Instructions
PERSONS ON BOARD: The number of persons on board.

☞ In the fields CARGO/TYPE and STATE, it is only possible to choose between specified entries.
This is done in the list which appears after clicking on the field concerned.
When the cursor is situated on the field CARGO/TYPE or STATE, a small window appears
below this field, containing information about the entry.
SOLAS Chapter VII - Carriage of dangerous goods

requires among other things the declaration of hazardous substances contained in the
cargo.
MAPOL Annex II - Regulations for the Control of Pollution by Noxious Liquid
Substances in Bulk
defines the following categories for hazardous liquid substances:
Category A - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning or
deballasting operations would present a major hazard to either marine resources or human health
or cause serious harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore justify the appli-
cation if stringent anti-pollution measures. Examples are acetone cyanohydrin, carbon disulphide,
cresols, naphtalene and tetraethyl lead.
Category B - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning or
deballasting operations would present a hazard to either marine resources or human health or cause
harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore justify the application if special
anti-pollution measures. Examples are acrylonitrile, carbon tetrachloride, ethylene dichloride and
phenol.
Category C - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning or
deballasting operations would present a minor hazard to either marine resources or human health
or cause minor harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore require special
operational conditions. Examples are benzene, styrene, toluene and xylene.
Category D - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning or
deballasting operations would present a recognizable hazard to either marine resources or human
health or cause minimal harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore require
some attention in operational conditions. Examples are acetone, phosporic acid and tallow.
118 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 10.2 Channel Management
10.2 Channel Management
Automatic Setting Procedure

The AIS system cannot function unless all AIS systems communicate on the same VHF channels and
unless the communication bandwidth and the transmission level are correctly set. The settings needed
for this are normally made automatically as described in the following.
☞ It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in exceptional cases after
the ship's command personnel have been informed accordingly, see page 120.
VHF channels 2087 and 2088 are used worldwide for the two AIS channels.
As default values, AIS channel A uses the VHF channel 2087 the AIS channel B uses the VHF channel
2088, and for both channels, the bandwidth setting is Auto, and transmission is performed with power
level High.
In particular geographical regions or situations, it is necessary to deviate from these settings. The neces-
sary values are received via the AIS channels. 1)
These data also contains the information about the region in which these settings are to be used,
including the transition zone surrounding that region.
The switch-over is performed automatically when the ship is
Sees
located in the transition zone. This is done in the following steps:
A, B, D, E, F
- As soon as the ship reaches the boundaries of the transition
zone, one AIS channel is set to the different VHF settings Sees Sees
B, C, D C, D, F
(with the other AIS channel remaining unchanged) and the
alarm Channel management changed is shown. As a result,
the targets situated inside and on either side of the transition
zone are now seen 2) and the ship is also seen by these A C E
targets; see the diagram.
- On leaving the transition zone, the second AIS channel is also
switched over to the different VHF settings. B D F
The general effect is that a ship which is not located in the transi-
tion zone does not see any targets located behind the transition
zone.
Region with Area with
different VHF Transition default VHF
settings zone settings
1) However, these data can also be transferred by DSC. The AIS electronics unit also has a DSC receiver, so that even AIS electronics units
which do not have their AIS channels set correctly can receive these data.
2) When the channel management is used, this usually changes the VHF channels. This example refers to such a change
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 119

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
10.2 Channel Management Operating Instructions
Viewing of Data Sets for the Electronics Unit Settings

AIS SETTINGS
The display appears in the AIS SETTINGS Dialog CHANNEL
CHANNEL MANAGEMENT
MANAGEMENT: Click on the MENU button, and then click on
AIS DATA SET USED
AIS. Click on the AIS SETTINGS button with MORE, and then CH A CH B
(with DO) click on CHANNEL MANAGEMENT. SELECT TX RX TX RX
CH NUMBER 2087 2088
There, the settings that are currently effective are displayed:
BANDWIDTH AUTO AUTO
The status of the displayed data set is shown in the top line: POWER LEVEL HIGH
Before DATA SET: PAGE 1 2 STORE NEXT
- (no entry): Default values
MORE CLOSE
- AIS: Data have been received via one of the VHF trans-
ceivers. With the MORE button the other AIS OBJECT
- DSC: Data have been received via the DSC transceiver. DATA Dialogs can be opened
- MAN: Data have been entered manually.
After DATA SET:
- USED: The data currently being used by the AIS electronics unit
- NOT USED: Data are currently not being used by the AIS electronics unit.
- EDITED: The displayed data have been altered manually but have not yet been stored.
In the line SELECT, there is a display for channel A and channel B, indicating whether the trans-
mitter (TX) and/or the receiver (RX) is switched on.
By clicking on PAGE 2, the rest of the data in the data set
(geographical region and transition zone) can be displayed.
BANDWIDTH AUTO AUTO
If there are any more data sets, they can be called up with the POWER LEVEL HIGH
NEXT button.
PAGE 1 2 STORE NEXT
DO CLOSE
Entering a Data Set Manually
1. Call the AIS SETTINGS Dialog CHANNEL MANAGE-
MENT (as described above). AIS SETTINGS
CHANNEL MANAGEMENT
2. Enter the given values. NORTHEAST
☞ Only data sets for regions up to a distance of a few
LAT
LON
55:00.000 N
012:00.000 E
hundred NM can be entered.
SOUTHWEST
3. Click on the STORE button. After the appropriate LAT 54:00.000 N
answering of a safeguard question, the edited data set is LON 011:00.000 E
stored. TRANSITION ZONE 5 NM
WARNING: PAGE 1 2 STORE NEXT
Changes of the VHF channels in use (by MORE CLOSE
entering a data set) shall be done by author- DO
ised and well skilled personnel only. Each With the MORE button the other AIS OBJECT
DATA Dialogs can be opened
change may have a serious influence on the
VHF communication between AIS systems.
120 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 10.3 Displaying Own AIS Data and AIS State
10.3 Displaying Own AIS Data and AIS State
Own AIS Data

The display of own AIS data takes place in a manner similar to MORE
that of the display of the additional AIS target data (see page
103) if, with MORE, you click on own ship's symbol instead of DISPLAY OWN AIS DATA
an AIS target, and then click on DISPLAY OWN AIS DATA. DO
AIS State
AIS OBJECT DATA
In the Multidisplay, after clicking on IDENTIFICATION, the addi- DO
TARGET ID Own Ship
tional AIS OBJECT DATA Dialog AIS STATE can be opened. IDENTIFICATION
The fields UTC to ROT contain information about own naviga-

tional sensors whose data are transmitted as own AIS data. IDENTIFICATION
Page 103 NAVIGATION DATA
AIS OBJECT DATA
☞
SHIP DATA
SHIPAIS OBJECT
DATA DATA
External means that the GPS receiver connected exter-
DO AIS STATE
nally to the AIS electronics unit is being used for this
purpose.
Internal means that the internal GPS receiver in the AIS AIS OBJECT DATA
TARGET ID Own Ship
electronics unit is being used for this purpose.
AIS STATE
ROT Other source means that an approved ROT sensor UTC Clock OK
is not being used, and so only the direction but not the rate POSN External DGNSS
of the heading change is transmitted. In this case, only the SOG/COG External
direction of turn (port/starboard manoeuvre) can be HDG Valid
displayed on the receiving system. ROT Other source
CH MAN 24.03.02 11:43
In the field CH MAN, the time of the last change of channel
MORE CLOSE
management data as reported by the AIS electronics unit is
stated. With the MORE button the other AIS
OBJECT DATA Dialogs can be opened
10.4 Reducing the Transmission Power when Loading and Unloading Tankers
During the loading and unloading of tankers, the transmission power of the AIS transmitter must be
reduced for safety reasons. This Low Power mode is only admissible by regulations for this particular situ-
ation. The corresponding button is therefore only provided on tankers, and the Low Power mode can only
be switched on when the navigational state AT ANCHOR or MOORING is entered in the AIS VOYAGE
DATA Dialog; see page 117.
This setting is made in the AIS SETTINGS Dialog AIS
AIS SETTINGS
CONTROL:
AIS CONTROL
Click on the MENU button, and then, in the AIS menu, click the
AIS SETTINGS button. In the Multidisplay, the AIS SETTINGS
Dialog AIS CONTROL appears. LOW POWER MODE OFF
Switching on the Low Power mode: Set LOW POWER MODE

DO
to ON.
On completion of the loading procedure, the Low Power mode must be switched off again by setting the
button LOW POWER MODE to OFF.
☞ If the operator forgets to deactivate the Low Power mode, the transmitter is automatically switched
to normal power when AT ANCHOR or MOORING is no longer entered as the navigational state, or
when the own ship´s speed exceeds 3 kn.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 121

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
10.5 Switching Off the Transmitter Operating Instructions
10.5 Switching Off the Transmitter
If necessary, the transmitting of your own AIS data can be completely prevented:
This setting takes place in the AIS SETTINGS Dialog AIS
CONTROL: AIS SETTINGS
AIS CONTROL
Click on the MENU button, and then, in the AIS menu, click
the AIS SETTINGS button. In the Multidisplay, the AIS TRANSMITTER ON
SETTINGS Dialog AIS CONTROL appears.
DO
By clicking on the TRANSMITTER area, the transmitter part
of the AIS electronics units switched on and off.
CAUTION:
The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional
cases, because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be
detected as an target by other ships and cannot participate in the
communication between ships, equipped with AIS.
☞ The status TRANSMITTER ON/OFF is stored with date and time and can also be called up after an
accident at sea.
122 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 11 AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations
11 AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations

◆ Data display of the AIS Aids-to-Navigation and base
stations
◆ Transmitting a safety message to a base station
AIS Aids-to-Navigation are navigation marks which are reported by the AIS electronics unit. Base
stations are shore stations which form part of the AIS system. Both object classes are displayed in the
PPI if their display is not switched off - see page 57.
For the display of the Aids-to-Navigation, the same symbols are used as for the maps, the User Chart
Objects and the electronic chart of type ENC. In addition, they are marked by means of a blue circle.
Symbol of the base stations:
The information about the Aids-to-Navigation and base stations can be displayed. It is also possible to
send safety messages to base stations.
Displaying Data of Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations

1.DO 1.DO
or
1. Click the desired Aid-to-Navigation or base station
symbol 1). In the Multidisplay, the AIS OBJECT DATA
Dialog IDENTIFICATION then appears, with the data of the
clicked object: AIS OBJECT DATA
2.DO AID-TO-NAV
AID-TO-NAV: The object is an Aid-to-Navigation or IDENTIFICATION
BASE STATION: The object is a base station. MMSI 266492671
MMSI: Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definite identifica- NAME
tion of the AIS system (and hence of the object) TYPE
NAME: Name of the Aid-to-Navigation Buoy, lateral
TYPE: Type of the Aid-to-Navigation starboardhand
2. After clicking on IDENTIFICATION, the AIS OBJECT DATA

Dialog NAVIGATION DATA can be opened, as with the MORE CLOSE
display of the additional AIS target data - see page 103.
There, the position, bearing and range of the object are OBJECT DATA Dialogs can be opened
displayed.
Transmitting a Safety Message to a Base Station

In the case of a base station, the button SEND SAFETY MESSAGE is present in the AIS OBJECT DATA
Dialog IDENTIFICATION. By clicking on that button, the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog is opened. From
that Dialog, a safety message can be sent to this base station - see page 113.
Alternative method of opening the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog: Click on the base station symbol with
the MORE key, and then click on the SEND SAFETY MESSAGE button (with the DO key).
1)
Alternative method for base stations: Click on the base station symbol with the MORE key, and then click on the button SHOW AIS DATA
(with the DO key).
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 123

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
11 AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
124 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring
Operating Instructions 12.1 Target Alarm Settings
12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring

◆ Acquisition and guard zones
◆ Computations for collision avoidance; setting of the TCPA and
CPA limits
◆ Track monitoring
◆ Depth alarm
◆ Suppression of certain alarms
12.1 Target Alarm Settings
For the automatic target acquisition of the radar, two acquisition/guard zones are available; they are inde-
pendent of one another.
Each acquisition/guard zone consists of a segment of a circle which moves along with the selected radar
antenna as its centre. The depth of the segment is 1 NM in each case. Its diameter (range) and angle
can be adjusted.
The function of the acquisition/guard zone and the alarms generated with the aid of that zone are
described on page 93.
The task of switching the acquisition/guard zone on and off
is performed in the TARGET ALARMS Dialog: Click on the TARGET ALARMS
MENU button, and in the ALARMS menu click on the ACQUISITION / GUARD ZONES
TARGET ALARMS button. The TARGET ALARMS Dialog ZONE 1 ZONE 2
then appears on the Multidisplay.
Alternative for opening the Dialog: Click on the horn Page 126 DANGEROUS TARGETS
symbol with MORE and then (with DO) on TARGET TCPA LIMIT 15 min
ALARMS. CPA LIMIT 0.5 NM
Page 97 AUTO AIS TGT ACQ
1.MORE
CLOSE
ALARM SETTINGS 2.DO

TARGET ALARMS
TRACK/DEPTH ALARMS Page 126
SENSOR MONITOR Page 83
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 125

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
12.2 Track Monitoring (Track Alarms and Waypoint Approaching Alarm) Operating Instructions
Setting the Computation for Collision Avoidance

The setting procedure takes place in the TARGET ALARMS Dialog: Click on the MENU button, and in
the ALARMS menu click on the TARGET ALARMS button. The TARGET ALARMS Dialog then appears
on the Multidisplay.
Switching the Computation for Collision Avoidance On and Off

The computation for collision avoidance is switched on and off
TARGET ALARMS
with the DANGEROUS TARGETS button.
Changing the TCPA / CPA Limits DO

DANGEROUS TARGETS
Click on the TCPA LIMIT or on the CPA LIMIT field, and then TCPA LIMIT 15 min
enter the value with the virtual keyboard. CPA LIMIT 0.5 NM
DO
Reference of the TCPA / CPA data DO
The computation for collision avoidance is executed for the reference position as shown in the
REF = CON / RADAR indicator in the position sensor display(see Section 5.4).
12.2 Track Monitoring (Track Alarms and Waypoint Approaching Alarm)
When a System Track is defined, every radar indicator and every CHARTPILOT checks continuously
whether the course defined by the System Track is being maintained, whether the ship‘s System Position
is situated on the System Track, and how much time remains until arrival at the wheel-over point 1) of the
TO-waypoint. 2) If one of the limits entered for this purpose is exceeded, an alarm is given if the relevant
alarm function is in the switched-on state.
The settings for this are made in the TRACK / DEPTH
ALARMS Dialog: Click on the MENU button, and in the TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS
ALARMS menu click on the TRACK/DEPTH ALARMS
LIMITS COURSE 10 °
button. The TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS Dialog then appears 999 m
TRACK
on the Multidisplay.
WPT APPROACH 120 sec
Alternative for opening the Dialog: Click on the horn
symbol with MORE and then (with DO) on TRACK / DEPTH ECHOSOUNDER
ALARMS. Page 128 DEPTH ALARM 999 m
CLOSE
1) For the case that the ship is beside the track, the wheel-over point is understood in these Operating Instructions as being a point on the
wheel-over line, a line that passes through the wheel-over point at right angles to the straight leg.
2) Insofar as the own speed is needed for the calculations, the indicator uses the data of the selected speed sensor.
126 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring
Operating Instructions 12.2 Track Monitoring (Track Alarms and Waypoint Approaching Alarm)
Input of Course and Track Limit

Click on the COURSE or on the TRACK field, and then enter
the value with the virtual keyboard.
LIMITS COURSE 10 °
☞ The manual input can be made at any indicator. No TRACK 999 m
system-wide equalisation takes place as a result. If a DO
DO
System Track is defined, then on passing a waypoint the
limits that were entered in the track for this waypoint
become valid and are displayed and used system-wide.
Adjusting the Indication of the Approach to the Wheel-Over Point

Click on the WPT APPROACH field, and then enter the value
with the virtual keyboard.
DO
Switching the Output of the Alarms On and Off

For the radar indicator that is being operated, the output of the DO
alarms can be switched on and off. This is done jointly for the LIMITS COURSE 10 °
alarms regarding course and track by clicking on the LIMITS or TRACK 999 m
button, and for the waypoint approaching alarm it is done by DO
clicking on the WPT APPROACH button.
☞ The switched-on alarms are generated by each radar indi-
cator and each CHARTPILOT individually, and must also
be acknowledged on each of these units. To avoid multiple
acknowledgement, it is recommended that the alarms
should be switched on at one unit only.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 127

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
12.3 Depth Alarm Operating Instructions
12.3 Depth Alarm
If the water depth measured under the transducer by the connected navigation echosounder is less than
the limit that is entered for this, the depth alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED is given.
The settings for this are made in the TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS Dialog: Click on the MENU button, and
in the ALARMS menu click on the TRACK/DEPTH ALARMS button. The TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS
Dialog then appears on the Multidisplay.
Alternative for opening the Dialog: Click on the horn symbol with MORE and then (with DO) on TRACK
/ DEPTH ALARMS.
Input of the Depth Limit

Click on the DEPTH ALARM field, and then enter the value
with the virtual keyboard. TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS
☞ The input can be performed on any radar indicator and any

CHARTPILOT of the system. The value is automatically
equalised system-wide. The most recent input is valid. ECHOSOUNDER
DEPTH ALARM 20 m
DO
For the radar indicator that is being operated, the output of the
depth alarm can be switched on and off by clicking on the DO ECHOSOUNDER
DEPTH ALARM 20 m
DEPTH ALARM button.
☞ The Depth display, available in the Multidisplay contains the depth limit line if the output of the depth
alarm is switched on.
The alarm that is switched on is generated individually by each radar indicator and each CHART-
PILOT, and must also be acknowledged on each of these units. To avoid multiple acknowledgement,
it is recommended that the alarm should be switched on at one unit only.
12.4 Suppressing Certain Alarms
Sea areas exist where some of the available alarms are

activated repeatedly and could distrub the navigatioanl ALARM SETTINGS
tasks of the operator, therefore the output of the alarms Page 181 BUZZER
LOST TARGET(n) for AIS targets, DO AIS LOST TARGET
POSITION STATUS CHANGED, DO POSITION STATUS CHANGED
LOG STATUS CHANGED and DO LOG STATUS CHANGED
BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM 1) DO BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM
can be switched on and off by the operator: In the ALARM
menu, click on SETTINGS and then with DO on the corre-
sponding button.
1) The availability of the BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM button can be set on service level.
128 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 13 Trial Manoeuvres
Operating Instructions 13.1 General
13 Trial Manoeuvres

◆ Setting a trial manoeuvre
◆ Relative and true display of the trial manoeuvre
13.1 General
Trial manoeuvres are needed mainly for collision avoidance. In this process, a planned manoeuvre of
own ship is simulated and the effect of this manoeuvre on the targets being tracked or plotted is checked
in a graphic display. 1)
The trial manoeuvre can be specified by
- simulation of a course change, including the radius to be used by the ship and
- the period of time up until the beginning of the simulated manoeuvre (the delay) and by
- simulation of a speed change at the instant of the manoeuvre.
There are two display modes available:
- At the instant when the trial manoeuvre function is switched on, a switch-over to Relative Display
mode takes place. This display mode is used for fast setting of the necessary course-change, of the
delay and of the speed change.
- In True Display mode, the manoeuvre radius that can then be set and the acceleration 2) for the set
speed-changes are taken into account additionally.
☞ The target tracking/plotting and the automatic target acquisition are not interrupted during the execu-
tion of a trial manoeuvre.
☞ It is recommended to use the trial manoeuvre function in relative mode in order to evaluate the
change of relative target data. If the true mode is used, it is recommended to select a speed sensor
with water stabilisation (water track).
Switching On the TRIAL MANOEUVRE Dialog

Click on the buttons MENU, UTILITIES and TRIAL
TRIAL MANOEUVRE
MANOEUVRE one after the other. This causes switching into
the Relative Display of the radar synthetics. The general CSE 298 ° SPD 19.5 kn
screen-stabilisation (TM or RM) and the alignment of the DELAY 0 min RAD
heading line remain unchanged. REL TIME
ID 9 13
In the Multidisplay, the TRIAL MANOEUVRE Dialog appears, TCPA 4:29 14:20 min
with the following data: CPA 0.13 1.78 NM
- CSE: The currently existing course 3) BCT 4:09 6:34 min
- SPD: The currently existing speed 3) BCR 0.20 0.46 NM
- DELAY: 0 minutes. CLOSE
- ID, TCPA, CPA, BCT, BCR: Current data of the two
targets selected last, see 2 T a r g e t s D i s p l a y on page 102.
1) As the own speed, the indicator uses the values shown in the speed display.
2) The acceleration behaviour of the ship is entered at service level during setting-to-work.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 129

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
13 Trial Manoeuvres RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
13.1 General Operating Instructions
The following changes occur in the PPI:

- In the lower region of the PPI, a large, flashing is shown to draw attention to the fact that the trial
manoeuvre display is switched on and that, consequently, the symbols and vectors of the targets
being tracked are no longer being displayed in accordance with the real situation that actually exists
at that time.
- The vector display (of the targets) is switched on.
- The vectors are displayed relative.
- Past position plots, if any exist, are displayed relative.
☞ Because the currently existing values were taken over, no manoeuvre has been simulated yet.
Past position plots

are displayed Trails remain
relative unchanged
Targets get
relative vectors
Identification
marking of trial
manoeuvre display
Display before switch-on of the trial manoeuvre Display after switch-on of the trial manoeuvre
(with true vector display) (the target on the right is on a collision course)
3) The resultant value used for the display of the own ship vector
130 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 13.2 Setting the Trial Manoeuvre in Relative Display Mode
13.2 Setting the Trial Manoeuvre in Relative Display Mode
Because the vector display during the trial manoeuvre is a relative display, a collision course can be
recognised from the fact that the vector of a target is pointing towards the own ship symbol (constant
bearing). A manoeuvre must be simulated which avoids this constant bearing while at the same time
fulfilling other conditions (e.g. keeping within the channel, avoiding shallow water, etc.).
A suitable vector-length should be set.
Simulating a Course Manoeuvre

Click on the CSE field, set the trackball to the desired course change, and 2.
1.DO
press the DO key for the second time.
☞ During adjustment, the simulated course change is displayed in the
CSE 10°
3.DO
CSE field, and after the second DO click the resulting course is
displayed there.
A course change of max. 90° can be simulated.
Because of the Relative Display mode, the speed vectors are rotated by the simulated course-
change.
Setting the Time Instant of the Simulated Manoeuvre

Click on the DELAY field, use the trackball to set the time that is to pass 1.DO
2.
before the simulated manoeuvre begins, and press the DO key for the
second time. DELAY 8 min
☞ The situation at the point in time defined by the delay value is now 3.DO
displayed. The own ship symbol and the speed vectors have been
shifted accordingly. If the display of the past position plot is switched
on, the shifted target-vectors can be assigned to the targets by
means of dashed lines.
Past position plots have rotated in the
simulation of the course change
Trails remain
unchanged
Heading lines of AIS targets
remain unchanged
Distance up until the

Vectors position plots have rotated in the trial manoeuvre, as
simulation of the course change selected with DELAY
No risk of collision
(vector shows suffi-
ciently large passing
distance from the trial
manoeuvre position)
Trial manoeuvre
position
Relative display after setting of a trial manoeuvre

which would prevent a collision
If no suitable manoeuvre can be found by means of these two settings, a speed change must be simu-
lated:
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 131

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
13.3 Checking the Trial Manoeuvre in True Display Mode Operating Instructions
Simulation of a Speed Change 2.

1.DO
Click on the SPD field, use the trackball to set the speed at which the ship
SPD 13 kn
is to travel from the beginning of the simulated manoeuvre onwards, and
3.DO
press the DO key for the second time.
☞ Because of the Relative Display mode, the simulated course-change causes a change in the direc-
tions and lengths of the speed vectors. The display is based on the simplifying assumption that, from
the beginning of the manoeuvre onwards, the ship travels at the set speed.
Rules for the Avoidance of Collision Courses:

1. There must be no speed vector of a target pointing towards the own ship symbol of the trial
manoeuvre.
2. The target data displayed in the TRIAL MANOEUVRE Dialog refer to the manoeuvre that was just
simulated. The distances must be adequate.
☞ The ID field goes red as soon as the target data in the simulated manoeuvre fall below the
preset TCPA/CPA limits.
3. All manoeuvres and parameter settings must take place in accordance with the collision avoidance
rules and good seamanship.
13.3 Checking the Trial Manoeuvre in True Display Mode
In True Display mode, the trial manoeuvre is displayed with true vectors. Both the radius planned for the
manoeuvre and the acceleration behaviour for the speed change that is set are taken into account. All
settings made in Relative Display mode can still be changed in True Display mode.
Switch-On of the True Display Mode

DO
The switch-over between true and Relative Display mode is
REL
performed in the TRIAL MANOEUVRE Dialog by clicking on the
REL or TRUE button.
☞ It is possible at any time to switch between the two display TRIAL MANOEUVRE
modes without any loss of data or information. CSE 359 ° SPD 19.5 kn
☞ It is recommended to use the true trial manoeuvre together

DELAY 8 min
TRUE
RAD 2.0 NM
TIME 0 min
with a speed sensor giving speed through water (WT).
☞ Whenever it is not sure that the calculated data are correct
or stable, it is recommended to perform the Trial Manoeuvre
in REL mode.(See page 131)
As a result of the switch-over, the following changes occur:
- True vectors are displayed.
- Own ship and targets are shown at their currently existing positions.
- The trial manoeuvre line is displayed. It represents the track on which the ship would perform the
simulated manoeuvre. The radius displayed behind RAD in the Multidisplay is taken into account.
The simulated manoeuvre-radius can now be changed:
132 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 13.4 Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display
Changing the Simulated Manoeuvre-Radius 2.

1.DO
Click on the RAD field, use the trackball to set the radius with which the
RAD 1.0 NM
course change is to take place, and press the DO key for the second time.
3.DO
Checking the Trial Manoeuvre
By means of TIME, the instant of time that is to be considered can be set: 2. To check,
1.DO
Click on the TIME field and, with the trackball, vary the time instant that is vary this
to be displayed. By continuous variation, a synchronised display of the 10 min

TIME
simulated own ship positions and target positions takes place. If, for all
TIME values, an adequate distance between own ship symbol and the
target symbol is displayed, the trial manoeuvre will not show a dangerous
approach.
End the check by pressing the DO key.
If necessary, any of the trial manoeuvre settings can now be changed and the check can be repeated.
Trial manoeuvre line
Radius that is set Radius that is set with RAD

with RAD
The present own position

Positions after the time
entered at TIME
Display after switch-over to True Display mode Check by variation of the TIME input
13.4 Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display
Switching off is performed by pressing the CLOSE button of the TRIAL

DO
MANOEUVRE Dialog.
CLOSE
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 133

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
13.4 Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display Operating Instructions
134 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 14 Events and Position Fixes
14 Events and Position Fixes

◆ Display, setting and deleting of event markers
◆ Display, setting and deleting of position fixes
Event markers and position fixes only exist at the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR if a CHARTPILOT
is connected.
All event markers and position fixes generated in the system are only displayed in the Chart mode. This
display cannot be suppressed.
In the Radar mode, event markers can be set. In the Chart mode, event markers can be set and deleted.
Position fixes can only be set and deleted at the CHARTPILOT and at the MULTIPILOT.
Symbols Used:
Position fix Time of the fix
Event marker (hours and minutes, UTC)
1342
Freely editable text
Container
dG
Method of position-determination
(abbreviation defined in ECDIS rules)
☞ The display of the text labels is switched on/off with the TEXT LABELS
button in the CHART menu, see page 57 or page 60.
Further items of information (date, time of setting, geographical position) can be seen in the info box on
the CHARTPILOT.
Setting an Event Marker 1a.DO

EVENT or
EVENT
1. Click on the EVENT button or press the EVENT key, and
then click on the DROP EVENT button. At the existing 1b.DO
DROP EVENT
own position, an event marker is displayed in the PPI. In PRINT SCREEN
the Multidisplay, the DROP EVENT Dialog appears.
There, the date and time are recorded (in UTC) under
DATE and TIME. Page 25
2. If the event marker is not to be set at the existing own DROP EVENT
position: click on the event marker, and then click on the POSITION
desired event position. The position of the event marker is LAT 54:44.000 N
LON 012:00.000 W
displayed under POSITION in the DROP EVENT Dialog.
Alternative: click on the event marker and enter the posi- DATE TIME
tion into the LAT/LON fields of the DROP EVENT Dialog. 24/06/02 11:43:27
3. If the event marker is to be provided with a text label, this 3 DO

REMARK
label can now be entered under REMARK.
4 DO
DROP ABORT
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 135

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
14 Events and Position Fixes RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
4. By clicking of the DROP button, the event marker is stored with the set data and is therefore
displayed on all indicators of the system, where the Chart mode or the ECDIS mode is switched on.
If the Radar mode is switched on, the symbol disappears (because the display of the event markers
is not possible in Radar mode). If the Chart mode is switched on, the symbol disappears initially, and
it returns after a short time with the text label that was entered.
Final setting of the event marker can be prevented by clicking of the CLOSE button instead of the
DROP button.
Deleting Event Markers 1.DO
1. Switch to Chart mode. EVENT

DROP EVENT
2. Click on the EVENT button or press the EVENT key, and then 2.DO
DELETE EVENTS
click on the DELETE EVENTS button. The EVENT button PRINT SCREEN
becomes the DELETE button and flashes green/yellow.
3. Delete the event marker by clicking. As long as the DEL EV DELETE
Flashing
button is flashing, other event markers can be deleted in the
same way.
4. The deletion function of the cursor is switched off by clicking into the PPI with the MORE key or by
clicking again (with the DO key) on the DELETE button.
136 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 15 Editing of Pre-planned Tracks
15 Editing of Pre-planned Tracks

◆ Editing and modification of tracks
◆ Management of tracks
Before a Pre-planned track can be displayed and used in the PPI, it must be edited and stored on a
CHARTPILOT or on a radar indicator. 1) If there is a CHARTPILOT, it should be used for this work.
☞ On the CHARTPILOT, e.g. on the basis of the electronic chart, tracks can be edited much more
conveniently and also - thanks to the test possibilities available there - with greater nautical safety.
Pre-planned tracks are accommodated in catalogues, and can be identified within the catalog by means
of a track number and a track name. Catalogues can be created and also - if necessary - deleted.
Tracks can be generated (edited), and existing tracks can have their contents altered, or can be assigned
to other catalogues, or can be deleted.
☞ If there is a CHARTPILOT, it must always be in the switched-on state when work on tracks is being
done on the radar indicator, since the track data are physically stored in the CHARTPILOT.
☞ If there is no CHARTPILOT in the system and if the tracks are to be used on several radar indicators,
the tracks - including the catalogues - must be transferred to the other radar indicators; see page
221.
The Dialogs that are needed in connection with the editing of the tracks are opened from the TRACK
menu which is opened by clicking on the TRACK button. The following description is based on this menu.
Opens the LOAD TRACKS list for

- Loading of the track that is to be altered or copied TRACK
- Determining the track number for new tracks
Opens the EDIT TRACK list and EDIT TRACK Dialog for
- Editing (generating and changing) of tracks LOAD... EDIT...
- Creating catalogs
- Assigning tracks to other catalogs CLEAR... DELETE...
Opens the DELETE TRACKS list for

- Deletion of tracks
- Deletion of catalogs
1) If there is no CHARTPILOT, tracks from the connected GPS receiver can also be displayed if the system configuration is suitable for this.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 137

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
15 Editing of Pre-planned Tracks RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track Operating Instructions
15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track
Input of Management Data of the Track

1. First of all, it is necessary to define which catalog the track is to be stored in, and under which
number:
Defining the track number and the catalog: In the TRACK menu, click on the LOAD button, then,
in the Multidisplay, click on the desired catalog and see which track number is not yet being used.
Close the LOAD TRACKS list with the CLOSE button.
2. Calling up the EDIT TRACK Dialog: In the TRACK
menu click on the EDIT button. As a result, the EDIT EDIT TRACK
TRACK list appears in the Multidisplay. No. Name
3a.DO
☞ All of the tracks loaded are listed there. Tracks are
< NEW >
loaded by calling them up for display - see page 52. 1305 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 2
3. Let the marker remain at <NEW>, and open the EDIT 1306 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 5
TRACK Dialog by clicking on the EDIT button. 3b.DO
EDIT CLOSE
4. Inputting the track number: Click into the EDIT TRACK
field and enter the number of the track.
5. Specifying the catalog: Click into the CATALOG field; in the SELECT CATALOG list which then
opens, mark the desired catalog and click on SELECT.
6. Inputting the track name: It is entered in the NAME field.
The EDIT TRACK Dialog
Catalog Number and name of the track Aborting of editing;

no saving of the entries
Ending the editing properly;
entries are saved EDIT TRACK
CATALOG Management data
Number and name of
the waypoint NAME
STORE CLOSE Waypoint data
Editing function; this is activated (flashing) by WPT 1
clicking, and is selected with the MORE key. NEW
Switching over between the
PAGE 1 2 3 pages of the waypoint data
Sailing mode
RHUMB LINE TO WAYPOINT
Track control mode 1) RADIUS 1.00 NM Page 1 of the
Radius LAT 054:11.000 N waypoint data
LON 012:08.575 E APPLY
Position of the waypoint Take-over of the parameter data
(Display and alphanumerical input) entered on pages 1 to 3
PAGE 1 2 3
Course limit COURSE LIMIT Page 2 of the
waypoint data
TRACK LIMIT
Track limit
ECONOMY
Rudder economy 1) APPLY Take-over of the parameter data
entered on pages 1 to 3
Profile speed 1) PAGE 1 2 3

Page 3 of the
PROFILE SPEED
Planned speed waypoint data
PLANNED SPEED
1) Not relevant for the version described
in these Operating Instructions. Take-over of the parameter data
APPLY entered on pages 1 to 3
138 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track
Waypoint Data
Each waypoint has the following parameters:
- Number of the waypoint. This identifies the waypoint, is allocated consecutively within the track,
and can be displayed in the PPI.
- Name of the waypoint. This appears in the waypoint list when the TO-waypoint is being defined;
see page 56. This entry is not obligatory.
- Position of the waypoint. Geographical position based on WGS 84.
- Curve radius. Radius of the curve along which the ship is to sail at the waypoint.
- Sailing mode. This specifies whether a track section longer than 25 NM from this waypoint to the
next one is to be displayed as a rhumb line (Rhumb Line mode) or as a great circle (Great Circle
mode) 1).
- Course limit and track limit: These can be used to control the track monitoring; see page 126. In
addition, the track limit is of special significance for the chart monitoring performed by the CHART-
PILOT and MULTIPILOT.
- Planned Speed: This is used for the calculation of the passage plan that is carried out at the
CHARTPILOT.
- Track control mode, rudder economy, profile speed: In the system configuration involved here
(no TRACKPILOT, no SPEEDPILOT connected), these parameters are not important.
In general, the values entered for the TO-waypoint become effective at the wheel-over point of the TO-
waypoint. Exception: The Planned Speed becomes effective at the wheel-over point of the FROM-
waypoint.
General Editor Characteristics

A track is edited as follows: Beginning with waypoint No. 1, the waypoints are entered by defining of the
waypoint position. During this process, the waypoint number is automatically defined consecutively.
All other data are taken over from the preceding waypoint, unless the data are altered before the input
of the next waypoint. Therefore, while the first waypoint is being entered, it is a good idea in most cases
to already enter the data that are relevant for many waypoints. The following description is based on that
approach.
Subsequently,
- all parameter data can have changes and additions made to them,
- entered waypoints can be shifted,
- additional waypoints can be entered, and
- waypoints can be deleted.
1)
Track sections shorter than 25 NM are displayed as a rhumb line.
Great circle approximation: If the Sailing mode GREAT CIRCLE has been entered at a waypoint on the pre-planned track and the
distance from the next waypoint is larger than 25 NM, this leg is automatically approximated to a great circle. For this purpose, the program
divides this leg into subsections, each having a length of 10 NM, and places the ends of these subsections on the great circle.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 139

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track Operating Instructions
The process of Selecting the editing function that is neces-

sary for this in each case is done by clicking on the editing func- WPT 1
tion button with the MORE key and then clicking on the desired 1. MORE
NEW
function with the DO key. NEW
SELECT
The editing function is activated by clicking on the editing 2. DO
MOVE
function button. This is also in the active state immediately after DELETE
an editing function has been selected. The fact that the editing
function is active is indicated by the fact that the editing func- Is active (flashing)
tion button is flashing. MOVE
The active editing function is deactivated by clicking on the DO
(flashing) editing function button or by clicking into the PPI with Is not active
the MORE key. MOVE
Entering of Waypoints
Entering of the First Waypoint.

NEW
1. Activate the editing function NEW (button must then flash)
2. Enter all of the necessary parameter data. To do this, switch over to the other pages of the waypoint
data with the aid of the buttons PAGE 2 and PAGE 3.
In Sailing mode and Track Control mode, it is possible to switch over between the two possibilities
by clicking. In the case of all other parameters, input is performed by means of the virtual keyboard
after clicking on the input field.
3. The definition of the waypoint position can either be determined graphically or entered alphanu-
merically, whichever is desired:
Alphanumeric input: Any desired position can be entered. Entering takes place in the LAT and
LON fields on page 1. When the APPLY button is then clicked, all of the data entered for this
waypoint are taken over and a switch-over to the editing of the next waypoint takes place automat-
ically. The next waypoint number is displayed.
WARNING:
It must be ensured that the position entered refers to the chart datum
WGS84.
Graphic input: This is performed by clicking on the position in the PPI. This also causes data take-
over and switching forward (in the same way as with the APPLY button).
☞ During this process, the geographical coordinates of the cursor position are displayed in the
cursor display.
WARNING:
This position might be faulty, e.g. if an incorrect position offset has been
entered.
Input of the Other Waypoints

Editing function NEW is still active.
If necessary, alter the parameter data that were taken over before the first waypoint (this alteration can
also be made later) and enter the position of the next waypoint.
☞ In the graphic input process, the distance and direction of the cursor position relative to the previous
waypoint are displayed at the cursor.
140 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 15.1 Generating a New Pre-planned Track
☞ In the alphanumeric input process, when you click on the LAT and LON fields the coordinates of the
preceding waypoint appear. To alter them, you can jump to the right by entering the point.
Enter the other waypoints in the same way.
If the radius is entered, it is displayed in the track.
7
If the waypoints have been positioned so unfavourably
(short distance between waypoints, acute angles) and/or the 9
track lines
radii have been chosen so large that the ship will probably
not be able to sail along the track, this situation is indicated
by means of a special display of the track:
NM
- The track lines (the straight lines up to the FROM-
0
x. 2
waypoint and up to the NEXT-waypoint) are extended
ma
as far as the waypoints.
- In the display, the circular arc defined by the radius is
moved along the track line to the last waypoint until it
fits between the two track lines. 8
- This movement takes place up to the FROM-waypoint Behind the curve end of waypoint 7, this
curve does not fit into the angle formed
at the most, but not further than up to a distance of by waypoints 7, 8 and 9. Therefore, the
20 NM between the beginning of the curve and the curve is shown displaced, and the display
waypoint. of the pre-planned track is interrupted by
the display of the track lines.
Remedy (also possible later): Alter the parameter "Radius" or move the waypoint - see below.
Making Alterations or Additions to the Parameter Data

1. Activate the editing function SELECT (button must then flash). SELECT
2. The process of selecting the waypoint that is to be altered can take place
graphically or alphanumerically, whichever is desired:
Alphanumeric selection: Click into the waypoint number field and enter the desired number.
Graphic selection: Click on the waypoint in the PPI.
3. Make alterations or additions to the parameter data, and take the resulting parameter data over into
the track by pressing the APPLY button.
Moving of Waypoints
1. Activate the editing function MOVE (button must then flash).
MOVE
2. The process of selecting the waypoint that is to be altered can take place
graphically or alphanumerically, whichever is desired:
Alphanumeric selection: Click into the waypoint number field and enter the desired number.
Graphic selection: Click on the waypoint in the PPI.
3. The definition of the new waypoint position can either be determined graphically or entered alphanu-
merically, whichever is desired - see page 140.
Entering Additional Waypoints.

NEW
1. Activate the editing function NEW (button must then flash)
2. Define the waypoint in front of which the additional waypoint is to be inserted. The process of
selecting the waypoint that is to be altered can take place graphically or alphanumerically, whichever
is desired, see above, M o v i n g o f W a y p o i n t s .
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 141

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
15.2 Modifying an Existing Track Operating Instructions
Exception: If the last waypoint is selected, the new waypoint is inserted behind it (the track is length-
ened).
3. The definition of the new waypoint position can either be determined graphically or entered alphanu-
merically, whichever is desired - see page 140.
Deletion of Waypoints
DELETE
1. Activate the editing function DELETE (button must then flash).
2. Either click in the PPI on the waypoint that is to be deleted, or enter the number in the waypoint
number field.
Ending the Editing Process

Editing is ended by clicking on the STORE button. All entries
are stored 1). STORE CLOSE
☞ If the entries are not to be stored, the editing can be ended DO DO

by clicking on the CLOSE button.
If there is no CHARTPILOT in the system, data saving should be performed after every change in tracks
- see page 221. If the tracks are to be used on several radar indicators, the tracks - including the cata-
logues - must be transferred to the other radar indicators; see page 221 too.
15.2 Modifying an Existing Track
If an existing track 2) is to be modified, this track must be selected for display - see page 52.
1. Calling up the EDIT TRACK Dialog: In the TRACK menu, open the EDIT TRACK list with the EDIT
button.
2. By clicking, mark the track that is to be modified.
3. In the EDIT TRACK list, open the EDIT TRACK Dialog by clicking on the EDIT button.
4. The changes take place as described in Section 15.1.
15.3 Generating a New Track on the Basis of an Existing Track
The track that is to be used as the basis must already be selected for display - see page 52.
1. It is first necessary to define which catalog the track is to be stored in, and under which number.
Specifying the track number and the catalog: In the TRACK menu, click on the LOAD button,
and then click on the desired catalog and see which track number is not yet being used. Close the
list with the CLOSE button.
2. Calling up the EDIT TRACK Dialog: In the TRACK menu, open the EDIT TRACK list with the EDIT
button.
3. By clicking, mark the track that is to be used as the basis.
1) ... on the CHARTPILOT. If the CHARTPILOT is not operable, a message appears.

2)
If there is no CHARTPILOT, tracks from the connected GPS receiver can also be modified and can be stored in the RADARPILOT if the
system configuration is suitable for this.
142 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 15.3 Generating a New Track on the Basis of an Existing Track
4. In the EDIT TRACK list, open the EDIT TRACK Dialog by clicking on the EDIT button, and enter the
track number, the track name and (if necessary) the catalog - see page 138.
5. By clicking on the CLOSE button, a copy of the opened track is saved under the new number.
6. Mark the new track in the EDIT TRACK list and open the new track again with the EDIT button.
7. The changes and additions take place as described in Section 15.1.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 143

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
15.4 Managing the Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions
15.4 Managing the Pre-planned Tracks
If there is no CHARTPILOT in the system, the following functions only have an effect on the RADAR-
PILOT which is operated.
Creating a New catalog

A catalog is created if, in step 5 during the entering of the management data (see page 138) in the
process of generating a track, a new catalog name is entered in the field under Select catalog instead
of the marking of a catalog. When the EDIT TRACK Dialog is closed with the CLOSE button, a message
appears, stating that the new track cannot be stored because the catalog entered does not exist, and a
question appears, asking whether the catalog is to be created. If this question is answered with Yes, the
catalog is created.
Deletion of Tracks and Catalogs

DELETE TRACKS
1. In the TRACK menu, open the DELETE TRACKS list with /
the DELETE button. Initially, all catalogs that have been Catalogs
WORLD
created are listed there. NORTHSEA
BALTIC
2. Mark the desired catalog by clicking, and click on the 1.DO
ATLANTIC
DELETE button. As a result, the list of tracks that are
contained in the catalog appears.
3. By clicking, mark the track that is to be deleted, and click 2.DO
DELETE CLOSE
on the DELETE button. As a result, the marked track is
irretrievably deleted.
4. Repeat step 3 for any other tracks that are to be deleted.
If there are no more tracks present in the catalog that has DELETE TRACKS
been opened and if the DELETE button is then clicked, the /ATLANTIC
No. Name
catalog is deleted.
Giving a Different Number to a Track or Assigning a Track 3a.DO 1306 BRIXHAM-MIAMI 5
to a Different catalog 1307 FREEPORT-MIAMI
1308 FREEPORT-MIAMI 1
In the first step, the track is copied and is stored under the new
number or in a different catalog. The steps needed for this are 3b.DO
DELETE CLOSE
identical to steps 1 to 5 described in Section 15.3.
In the second step, the track under the old number or in the
previous catalog is deleted - see above.
144 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 16 Editing the Map
Operating Instructions 16.1 Preparing the Editing of the Map
16 Editing the Map

◆ Editing the map
◆ Symbols and lines of the map
The elements of the map must be entered (edited) on a radar indi-

cator and then distributed to the other indicators so that these
elements will then be available at these other indicators.
Various symbols and one type of line can be edited.
16.1 Preparing the Editing of the Map
So that loss of data does not occur during the data distribution
which is then necessary, editing should only be performed on the EDIT MAP
radar indicator having the most recent set of map data. NEW SYMBOL
BUOY, LATERAL
Calling the EDIT MAP dialogue STARBOARDHAND
Editing takes place in Radar mode. There, the EDIT MAP AT POSITION
dialogue must be opened: LAT 55:35.285 N
LON 008:36.437 W APPLY
Click on the MAP button, and then click on the EDIT MAP button.
The EDIT MAP dialogue then appears in the Multidisplay. The CLOSE
following description is based on this dialogue.
☞ If the display of the map has not yet been switched on, it is switched on by the opening of the EDIT
MAP dialogue.
Switching the Editing Function of the Cursor On and Off

Behind the button which displays the word NEW when the EDIT MAP dialogue is switched on, there are
all of the editing functions of the cursor.
By the clicking of this button, the cursor obtains the editing function displayed on this button. This is indi-
cated by flashing of the button. The editing function can now be executed by clicking into the PPI see
Section 16.2 and 16.3.
By clicking again on this button (or by clicking into the PPI with the MORE key), the editing function is
taken away from the cursor. The button stops flashing.
Selecting the Editing Function of the Cursor

EDIT MAP
If, with the MORE key, you click on the button which displays 1.MORE
NEW
the word NEW when the EDIT MAP dialogue is switched on, a
context menu opens, showing a list of all editing functions of or
the cursor. Click on the desired function.

2.DO
NEW NEW
MOVE CONTINUE
Editing functions of the cursor for symbols DELETE INSERT
MOVE
DELETE
Editing functions of the cursor for lines
DELETE ALL
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 145

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
16 Editing the Map RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
16.2 Editing of Symbols Operating Instructions
16.2 Editing of Symbols
Symbols can be inserted, moved or deleted.

Before a symbol is inserted, it must be defined. It can then be inserted by numeric input of the insertion
position or by clicking at the position on the PPI.
Defining can be done by selecting the symbol meaning or by graphic selection.
Defining the Symbol to be Inserted by Selecting its

1.DO
Meaning
EDIT MAP
1. Set the SYMBOL/LINE button to SYMBOL. 4.DO
NEW SYMBOL
2. In the button situated below that, select the symbol. 2.DO
BUOY, LATERAL
☞ All symbols that can be edited are listed. 3.DO
STARBOARDHAND
3. If the symbol can be supplemented by the addition of AT POSITION

elements, one of these elements is named in the button
situated below that. Correct the element if necessary.
☞ The symbol defined in this way is displayed in the graphics field.
4. Select the editing function NEW.
Selecting Graphically the Symbol to be Inserted

1.DO
1. Set the SYMBOL/LINE button to SYMBOL.

EDIT MAP
3.DO
2. Click into the graphics field and click on the desired NEW SYMBOL
symbol. BUOY, LATERAL
☞ The meaning of the selected symbol is displayed in
2.DO
STARBOARDHAND
the text fields.
All symbols that can be edited are shown.
The following symbols can be edited:
Beacon, lateral Buoy, lateral

- no topmark - no topmark
- porthand - porthand
- starboardhand - starboardhand
Beacon, cardinal Buoy, cardinal
- north - north
- east - east
- south - south
- west - west
Beacon, safe water Buoy, safe water

Beacon, special purpose Buoy, special purpose
Beacon, isolated danger Buoy, isolated danger
Wreck Anchorage area
146 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 16 Editing the Map
Operating Instructions 16.3 Editing of Lines
Inserting a Symbol by Numeric Input of the Position

1. With the virtual keyboard, input the geographical coordi-
nates behind LAT and LON. AT POSITION
2. By clicking on the APPLY button, the defined symbol is LAT 55:35.285 N
LON 008:36.437 W APPLY
inserted in the map at the position which you have entered.
1a.DO 2.DO
Inserting a Symbol by Clicking

008:36.
On the PPI, click on the insertion position. The specified object 1b. 1 2 3
4 5 6
is inserted in the map.
Moving of Symbols
1. Select the editing function MOVE.
2. On the PPI, click on the symbol that is to be moved. NEW
MOVE
3. Click on the insertion position or input the insertion position numeri- DELETE
cally (see above).
Deletion of Symbols
1. Select the editing function DELETE.
NEW
2. On the PPI, click on the symbol that is to be deleted. MOVE
DELETE
16.3 Editing of Lines
Lines are inserted by entering the line points one after another. These are thin, white, continuous lines.
Existing lines can be lengthened or deleted. On these lines, line points can be inserted, moved or deleted.
During the setting, insertion and moving of the line points, the distance and direction of the cursor position
are shown relative to the preceding line point.
Y
Example: Inserting a point Z
X
— X — Y — Z — : Existing line
2.35NM
Distance and direction of the cursor as seen from point X 251.3° Cursor
(Values are stated on the extension of the line from point X to the cursor.).
Inserting a New Line

1. Set the SYMBOL/LINE button to LINE.
1.DO
EDIT MAP
3. Set the starting point of the line by clicking on the PPI, or 2.DO
NEW LINE
input the insertion position numerically (see page 147).
COAST LINE
☞ Each further clicking action sets the next point of the line.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 147

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
16 Editing the Map RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
16.4 Ending the Editing of a Map Operating Instructions
Lengthening a Line
1. Select the editing function CONTINUE.
NEW
2. On the PPI, click on the starting point or end point of the line. CONTINUE
INSERT
3. Click on the insertion position. MOVE
☞ Each further clicking action sets the next point of the line.
DELETE
DELETE ALL
Inserting a Point on a Line

1. Select the editing function INSERT. NEW
2. Click on the line between the points where a point is to be inserted. CONTINUE
INSERT
3. Click on the position of the new point. MOVE
DELETE
☞ Begin the next insertion with step 2. DELETE ALL
Moving a Point of a line

1. Select the editing function MOVE. NEW
2. On the PPI, click on the point that is to be moved. CONTINUE
INSERT
3. Click on the new position. MOVE
DELETE
☞ Begin the next moving with step 2. DELETE ALL
Deleting a Point on a Line

1. Select the editing function DELETE.
NEW
2. On the PPI, click on the point that is to be deleted. CONTINUE
INSERT
☞ Each clicking action on another point of the line deletes that point. MOVE
DELETE
DELETE ALL
Deleting a Line Completely
1. Select the editing function DELETE ALL.
NEW
2. On the PPI, click on the line that is to be deleted. CONTINUE
INSERT
☞ Each clicking action on another line deletes that line. MOVE
DELETE
DELETE ALL
16.4 Ending the Editing of a Map
Editing is ended by clicking on the CLOSE button. All inputs are stored
automatically in the radar indicator that is being operated, and are CLOSE
available there for display.
So that the inputs can be displayed on other indicators too, the processed map data must be transferred
to these indicators in accordance with Section 27.5 - see page 219. Furthermore, data saving should be
performed (likewise in accordance with Section 27.5).
148 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 17 Displays in the Multidisplay
17 Displays in the Multidisplay

◆ Preparation and selection of the Multidisplay content
◆ Display to support the docking manoeuvre
◆ Enlarged display of the target video in the Zoom display
◆ Depth display
◆ Display of wind data, drift and set
In the Multidisplay, the items that can be displayed include not only the various Dialogs, which are
opened in various ways and which are described in the relevant context in these Operating Instructions,
but also four graphic displays and (optionally) the CAMERA Dialog. These are described in this section.
Control of the Multidisplay

Before a Dialog or a graphic display can be displayed in the Multidisplay, the Dialog or graphic display
must be switched on or opened. If several Dialogs or graphic displays are open, only one of them can be
displayed at a time. The Multidisplay can be imagined as consisting of a stack of Dialogs and graphic
displays, of which only the one at the upper surface is visible. In this connection, the following statements
are applicable:
In general, the Dialog or graphic display that was opened last is displayed.
If an alarm occurs, the (Dialog) alarm list is automatically opened and displayed. If the alarm list was
already open but was not being displayed, the occurrence of an alarm causes it to return to the surface.
The alarm list is closed automatically when there is no longer an alarm present.
In the context menu of the hidden OTHER button, all open Dialogs or graphic displays are listed. There,
the desired Dialog or graphic display can be brought to the surface by clicking.
☞ The functional principles of the hidden OTHER button are described on page 23.
If the context menu of the hidden OTHER button is too long and therefore too confusing, some
Dialogs and graphic displays that are not needed any more should be called up and closed by
means of their CLOSE button.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 149

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
17 Displays in the Multidisplay RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
17.1 Docking Display Operating Instructions
17.1 Docking Display
In the display ranges up to 1.5 NM, the distance and speed to a docking position can be displayed. For
this purpose, the docking position must first be defined on the PPI.
WARNING:
The computation might be based on faulty data (e.g. the ship contour
being displayed, which does not necessarily have to correspond suffi-
ciently accurately to the actual contour, or the data of the navigation
sensors), and so this display can only serve as an overview, and not as
the sole docking aid.
Switching the Docking Display On/Off

Click on the MENU button. Then, in the DISPLAY SETTINGS
menu, click on the DOCKING button.
As a result of switching on, the docking position symbol is addi- 2.DO MENU
DISPLAY SETTINGS
tionally set at own ship's position on the PPI.
At the same time, the Docking display appears on the Multidis- 3.DO
play. DOCKING
Specifying the Docking Position

DO
Shifting: Click into the circle of the docking position symbol.
Shift the symbol with the trackball, and at the desired position Shifting DO
press the DO key. The symbol is kept at this geographical posi- Rotating
tion.
Rotating: Click on the docking position symbol near to the circle but outside it. Rotate the symbol with
the trackball, and when the desired direction is reached press the DO key.
Adapting the Docking Display to Suit the Actual Starboard/Port Situation

In the Docking display, click on STBD or PORT.
PORT
DO
STBD Here, the arrangement in the Docking display can be

adapted to suit the actual starboard/port situation.
STBD arrangement:
The distance and speed between the starboard side at own
ship's bow and stern and the starboard side at the bow and
stern (respectively) of the docking position symbol
PORT arrangement:
The distance and speed between the port side at own ship's
bow and stern and the port side at the bow and stern (respec-
tively) of the docking position symbol
150 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 17.2 Zoom Display
17.2 Zoom Display
In modes North-Up and Course-Up, an enlarged video display of a PPI excerpt can be switched on. You
can specify whether the excerpt is to remain at a fixed position or is to be moved along together with a
tracked/plotted target or with own ship’s position.
☞ In this Zoom display, the area enlargement factor is 9 (the linear enlargement factor is 3).
Only the video is contained in the zoom image, i.e. no synthetics.
If the display of trails is switched on for the PPI, the trails in the Zoom display are always displayed
in True mode. This is indicated by a T in the upper right-hand corner of the Zoom display.
Switching the Zoom Display On/Off

Click on the MENU button, and then click on the ZOOM button
2.DO MENU
in the DISPLAY SETTINGS menu. DISPLAY SETTINGS
As a result, the zoom frame is set in the PPI at a fixed position
3.DO
around own ship's position. The frame marks the area displayed ZOOM
in enlarged form in the Zoom display.
At the same time, the Zoom display appears in the Multidisplay.
T = trails are displayed as true
trails in the Zoom display
MORE
ZOOM OFF
FIX ABS T
FIX REL
This menu appears after the MORE key has been used to click into the Zoom
display or on the zoom frame at its contour.
- Clicking on ZOOM OFF switches off the Zoom display.
- Clicking on FIX REL or FIX ABS switches over between a fixed Zoom
display and a Zoom display which is carried along (with own ship's position).
Clicking causes a switch-over between a fixed zoom frame (display FIX ABS) and a Zoom display
which is carried along (with own ship's position) (display FIX REL).
Display FIX TGT: The zoom frame is carried along with a target.
Positioning the Zoom Frame

Click into the Zoom display; then, at the desired position in the PPI, press the DO key.
Alternative: In the PPI, click on the zoom frame at its contour, position the zoom frame with the trackball,
and press the DO key.
☞ When the zoom frame reaches the PPI boundary, it is kept there so that it can be accessed at any
time. In this case too, the area marked by the frame is displayed in the Zoom display.
Switching Over between a Fixed Zoom Display and a Zoom Display being Carried Along with Own
Ship
The switch-over is done by clicking on the FIX ABS / FIX REL button situated in the Zoom display.
FIX ABS = the zoom frame has a fixed position.
FIX REL = the zoom frame is carried along with own ship, maintaining a constant distance and bearing
relative to own ship.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 151

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
17.3 Depth Display Operating Instructions
Carrying the Zoom Display Along with a Target

Click on the tracked/plotted target with the MORE key, and
1.MORE
then click on ZOOM FIXED ON TARGET (with the DO
key). The FIX ABS / FIX REL button situated in the Zoom
display now indicates by means of FIX TGT that the zoom 2.DO
ZOOM FIXED ON TARGET
frame is being carried along with the target displayed in the
frame.
☞ By clicking on the FIX ABS / FIX REL button or by positioning the zoom frame, the zoom frame is
set at a fixed position again and the Zoom display is no longer connected to the target.
17.3 Depth Display
If there is an echosounder connected, the actual and past depth can be displayed in the Depth display.
Switching the Depth Display On/Off

2.DO MENU
menu, click on the DEPTH button. DISPLAY SETTINGS
3.DO
DEPTH
Setting the Display Range

Click into the depth scale, then click on the desired display range. If you click on AUTO there, the display
range is automatically adapted to suit the measured values.
If an echosounder with several transducers is installed,

the selected transducer is noticed here.
If the depth alarm is switched on (see page 128), a red line is shown
at the set depth limit.
DO
AUTO The depth range is automatically adapted

10 m to suit the measured depth.
50 m
100 m
150 m
500 m
1000 m
Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation

echosounder at the location of the selected transducer
including the depth history of the past 10 minutes
152 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 17.4 Wind Display
17.4 Wind Display
If there is a wind sensor connected, the wind data and the set and drift caused by the current can be
displayed numerically and graphically on the Wind display.
Switching the Wind Display On/Off

2.DO MENU
menu, click on the WIND button. DISPLAY SETTINGS
3.DO
Specifying whether the Wind is to be Displayed True or WIND
Relative
Switch-over is performed by clicking into the top right-hand field
(T or R) of the Wind display.
Specifying whether the Wind Speed is to be Displayed in kn or in m/s

The switch-over is performed by clicking into the numerical field of the wind speed.
Wind direction and wind speed

R = relative wind, T = true wind;
switch-over by clicking
Ship symbol represents the present gyro heading

Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction
Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current
Red line: Actual course = gyro heading + drift angle
Direction and speed of the current,

If the selected speed sensor supplies both Bottom Track data and Water
Track data, the set and drift are computed from these. If the selected speed
sensor supplies only Bottom Track data or only Water Track data, the
system also uses data from other connected sensors. If a transverse compo-
nent is absent, the displayed values do not indicate the drift vector correctly.
This is the case, for example, if the longitudinal speed from the EM log is
supplemented by the speed over ground (from the GPS receiver).
If data entered manually are taken into

account in the computation of set and drift,
the fields have a yellow background.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 153

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
17.5 Camera Control (Optional Function) Operating Instructions
17.5 Camera Control (Optional Function 1))
From the radar indicator, it is also possible to control a target tracking camera that is suitable for this
purpose. The direction and focus of the camera (camera position) can be automatically kept at a fixed
position or on a tracked ARPA or AIS target.
Switching the Camera Control On/Off

2.DO MENU
Click on the MENU button, and then click on the CAMERA DISPLAY SETTINGS
button in the DISPLAY SETTINGS menu.
3.DO
CAMERA
As a result, the green camera symbol is set in the PPI
around own ship's position. At the same time, the CAMERA
Dialog appears in the Multidisplay.
Display and switch-over of the camera control mode:

FIXED ON HEADING: Camera does not perform tracking 1) CAMERA
FIXED ON TARGET: Camera performs tracking of a target FIXED ON TARGET
FIXED ON POSITION: Camera is kept at a fixed absolute position
BRG 236.1 ° R
RNG 1.24 NM
Display and setting of the relative bearing and range relative to the tracked target
T CRS 142.5 °
Course and speed of the fixed target (only with FIXED ON TARGET) T SPD 7.3 kn
LAT 54:44.000 N
Geographical coordinates of the camera position LON 012:00.000 W
1) Appears only after switch-on of the camera control CLOSE

function and on failure of the gyro; cannot be selected.
Setting the Camera Control

1. Click into the camera symbol; then, at the desired position in the PPI, press the DO key.
If the symbol is not set on a tracked target, the camera control mode Fixed on Position is switched
on and the camera position is fixed at this geographical position.
If, during this process, the symbol is set on a tracked target, the camera control mode Fixed on
Target is switched on (camera symbol = ) and the camera position tracks the target.
2. If the camera is to be fixed at a geographical position at which there is a tracked target, then in Fixed
on Target mode by clicking into the control mode field POSITION instead of TARGET can be
selected.
3. After clicking of the BRG field or RNG field, the camera position can be shifted relative to the fixed
target or fixed position.
☞ With the arrow keys of the virtual numeric keyboard, setting is performed continuously.
☞ When the camera symbol reaches the PPI boundary, it is kept there on the correct bearing.
1)
An additional Interface Expander (390003846) is needed for this purpose. The camera control interface is not implemented in Radar1100
or NACOS xx-5 COM-Expanders respectively.
154 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 18 Quick Info Box
Operating Instructions 18.1 Contents of the Quick Info Box
18 Quick Info Box

◆ Contents of the Quick Info box
◆ Operating procedure for the stopwatch
◆ Setting the zone time
18.1 Contents of the Quick Info Box
The position of the cursor defines which data are to be displayed in the Quick Info box:
If the cursor is situated in the PPI:
Time that would be needed in order to reach the
cursor position at the present speed.
Time of arrival at the cursor position if own ship approaches

the cursor position at its present speed
If the cursor is not situated in the PPI:
Stopwatch (for operating procedure, see Section 18.2)
Date, time, time zone

UTC: The time displayed is UTC
ZT: The time displayed is a zone time (date and time entered as
per Section 27.4, plus the time zone entered as per Section
18.3).
If the cursor is situated on an area that can be operated and the help function is switched on:
☞ For switching on the help function, see page 25
Function of the DO key at the cursor position
Function of the MORE key at the cursor position
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 155

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
18 Quick Info Box RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
18.2 Operating Procedure for the Stopwatch Operating Instructions
18.2 Operating Procedure for the Stopwatch
Starting the Stopwatch

DO
The stopwatch is started by clicking on the start symbol .
The previous timing value is reset to zero. Now, the time
which has elapsed since the stopwatch was started is
CLOCK: 01:23:14
displayed.
☞ The fact that the stopwatch is running can be recog-
nised from the fact that the rectangular symbol is CLOCK: 00:00:01
displayed black and not grey (insensitive).
Displaying the Intermediate Time

1.DO
1. An intermediate time can be displayed by clicking on
the pause symbol . The stopwatch continues to
run in the background.
CLOCK: 00:17:33
2.DO
2. To again display the time which has elapsed since the

starting of the stopwatch, you must click on the start
CLOCK: 00:17:33
symbol again.
CLOCK: 00:17:49
Stopping the Stopwatch

DO
The stopwatch is stopped by clicking on the stop
symbol . The time period measured is now displayed in
grey and remains unchanged until the stopwatch is started CLOCK: 00:26:06
again.
CLOCK: 00:26:06
18.3 Setting the Time Zone
After clicking on the ZT field, the time zone can be entered.

This setting acts throughout the entire system and can be set DO
between –13 to +13 hours.
☞ The time zone can also be set on any connected
CHARTPILOT.
1 2 3
4 5 6
156 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 19 Evaluation of the Radar Video
Operating Instructions 19.1 Achievable Radar Range
19 Evaluation of the Radar Video

◆ Achievable radar range
◆ Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video
◆ Influences of fog, rain, snow, hail
◆ Reflections from the sea surface
◆ Disturbances caused by other radars
◆ False or indirect echo displays
◆ Sectors of reduced radar visibility
◆ Superrefraction - subrefraction
◆ SART detection, Racon identification
◆ Transmission formats
◆ Sector Blanking
19.1 Achievable Radar Range
The theoretically achievable radar range limited by the curvature of the earth depends on the height
of the antenna above the water surface and the height of the target, and is applicable under normal
atmospheric conditions - see the following table.
Antenna Height Theoretically Achievable Radar Range

Above Water Surface at a Target Height of
1m 3m 10 m 30 m 100 m 300 m 1000 m
8m 9 NM 12 NM 13 NM 18 NM 28 NM 44 NM 76 NM
15 m 11 NM 13 NM 16 NM 21 NM 31 NM 47 NM 79 NM
30 m 12 NM 16 NM 19 NM 23 NM 34 NM 50 NM 82 NM
Whether radar targets can be detected up to this theoretical range, even with optimum video setting,
depends not only on the atmospheric conditions but also on the characteristics of the target:
- Large targets with good reflection characteristics produce strong echo signals and are displayed with
corresponding clarity on the screen.
- Smaller targets situated in the shadow of large objects are not illuminated by the radar pulses and
are therefore not displayed.
- Flat coasts have an unfavourable reflection cross-section and cannot be recognized until they have
been approached more closely. On the other hand, high coastlines and mountainous regions further
inland are recognised at a very early stage.
- In the coastal approaches, the tide rip lines and surf areas are displayed similarly to coastlines.
However, this rather irritating display can be a valuable orientation aid for the coastal navigator.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 157

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
19 Evaluation of the Radar Video RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
19.2 Distortions of the Radar Video Operating Instructions
- The reflections of radar waves from ice depend largely on the surface structure of the areas illumi-
nated by the radar. Rough and jagged surfaces produce good echo displays, whereas smoothly
frozen-over surfaces, rounded surfaces and surfaces at an oblique angle generally reflect the trans-
mitted pulses away from the ship. Thus, for example, the echo display of large icebergs can fluctuate
extremely severely, depending on the existing aspect.
- The detection of low-lying blocks of ice (growlers) probably presents the greatest uncertainty:
WARNING:
Even if the anticlutter facilities are operated carefully, the echoes from
growlers can no longer be definitely identified if moderate disturbances
from the sea surface are present.
19.2 Distortions of the Radar Video
Because of the physical characteristics of the radar principle used, the video displayed does not corre-
spond exactly to the position and form of the reflecting target. A distinction must be drawn between radial
distortions (in the direction of the target) and azimuthal distortions (perpendicular to the target direction)
- see figure on next page.
Radial Distortions
Radial distortions in the direction of transmission are caused by the fact that a target reflects the trans-
mitted pulse for as long as the pulse is moving past the target 1). Thus, radial lengthening depending on
the pulse duration occurs on the screen. In the case of range measurements, it must be noted that the
echo edge facing own ship corresponds to the true front edge of the target.
If there are several targets behind one another with small (radial) distances between them, they are
shown separately on the screen if, and only if, their distance apart is so large that the radial lengthened
echoes do not overlap.
Azimuthal Distortions
Azimuthal distortions are caused by the width of the beam radiated by the antenna. A point target
appears wider the further away it is. At a distance of 10 NM with a horizontal antenna-beamwidth of 1.5°,
an individual target is displayed as an arc with a length of 480 m. Because of this effect, individual targets
situated beside one another can merge to form a single target.
Not only individual targets but also small spits of land aligned in the radial direction appear wider than
they really are, and radially oriented entrances appear narrower than in reality.
☞ As a result of azimuthal distortions and/or changes in the target position, the radar centroid of a
target can change, especially at short range. In the case of a target being tracked, this can lead to
a sudden change in the displayed vector.
In addition to these undesirable azimuthal distortions, targets can also be deliberately widened with
increasing distance, so that narrow, close-range targets too can be seen clearly. This function is used in
the Clean Sweep modes Medium and High. It ensures that the azimuthal distortion corresponds to the
radial distortion over a wide range of distances. Because the radial distortion depends on the pulse
length, the targets are displayed particularly large by the selection of long pulse.
1) The pulse length setting LP thus generates larger radial distortions than SP.
158 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.3 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects
Width of the beam radiated

Two adjacent targets merge to by the antenna
form one radar echo (azimuthal
distortion)
A spit of land is displayed wider
An entrance is
Two targets behind one displayed narrower or
another merge to form one not at all
radar echo (radial distortion)
Radar video
Land contour
Radar video
Actual size of the target Azimuthal distortion
Radial distortion
Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video
19.3 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects
Disturbances of the radar video are caused by

- meteorological processes,
- reflections from the sea surface,
- radar signals from other transmitters,
- false echo displays,
- sectors of reduced radar visibility,
- superrefraction and subrefraction.
Influences of Meteorological Processes

The influence of meteorological phenomena such as fog, rain, snow or hail on the radar video increases
with the size of the droplets in relation to the radar wavelength, and with the density of the droplets. The
shorter-wave X-Band radar (with a wavelength of 3 cm) is therefore generally impaired more severely by
meteorological influences than is the longer-wave S-Band radar (10 cm wavelength).
X-Band Radar
Even in the X-Band radar, fog causes practically no disturbances, whereas precipitations with larger drop-
lets attenuate the transmitted radar pulses and thus weaken to a greater or lesser extent the display of
targets situated behind extensive areas of precipitation. Furthermore, throughout their entire extent, rain,
snow and hail reflect part of the transmitted energy and produce echoes in the form of milky areas in the
radar video (backscatter).
Because of the very different signal structures of useful targets and rain areas, rain clutter can be notice-
ably reduced by the rain clutter suppression function.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 159

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
19.3 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects Operating Instructions
In the case of strong, extended areas of rain, the losses become so great that the achievable range is
reduced very severely. Useful targets might be completely concealed.
S-Band Radar
The S-Band radar „sees“ through the rain with practically no attenuation losses, and even detects targets
in and behind a rain area. The echo signals caused by the rain are only displayed weakly. Similar behav-
iour is exhibited in the case of hail and snow.
In this case too, unusually heavy rain can reduce the achievable ranges and thus cause sudden loss of
targets.
Reflections from the Sea Surface

Clutter echoes from the surface of the sea can be recognised from the fact that a mostly circular but
eccentric area displaced in the wind direction and having non-uniform brightness is formed around the
own ship symbol (sea clutter). These echoes make targets in this region more difficult to detect and track,
but they have no effect on the display of targets situated behind the reflection zone.
These disturbances are more severe in the case of a radar antenna mounted high up than for one
mounted lower down. The area covered by these disturbances increases with increasing sea state, and
is increased particularly by steeper waves.
With the aid of the sea clutter suppression function, the disturbance echoes described above can be
reduced. However, since this also weakens the display of targets and because the target might not be
displayed with every revolution of the antenna, maximum concentration by the observer is necessary. In
the case of automatic target tracking, the sea clutter suppression function can lead to the loss of targets
due to the attenuation of the signals.
Disturbances Caused by Other Radars

Transmissions from other radars working in the same electrical frequency band occur as disturbances in
the form of small points or dashes. These move in rapid succession along straight or curved tracks to the
centre of the screen or in the opposite direction.
These disturbances appear particularly clearly at the larger range settings, but they impede radar obser-
vation to an insignificant extent only. They can be almost completely eliminated by means of the Inter-
ference rejection function.
False or Indirect Echo Displays

False or indirect echo displays ("ghost echoes") occur as a result of reflection of the radar pulses by the
ship's own superstructures of all kinds and by nearby objects that reflect very well. Therefore, a typical
feature of these echoes is that they appear at the bearing of the reflecting surface, regardless of the real
position of the targets.
When two ships pass one another on parallel courses, multiple echoes can often be observed as a result
of pulses reflected to and from several times between the ships' sides. On the screen, a series of equis-
paced echo displays of decreasing intensity appears at the bearing of the object.
Sectors of Reduced Radar Visibility

Sectors of reduced radar visibility occur as a result of own ship's superstructures which impair and
prevent rectilinear propagation of the radar pulses. Theoretical determination of the geometry of these
sectors and of their influence on the display of targets is possible to an inadequate extent only. An effec-
tive practical method consists of determining the shadow sectors against the background of disturbance
signals from the sea surface (sea clutter).
160 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.4 Radar Setting for the Display of Racon Codes
Superrefraction - Subrefraction
If the normal refraction gradient for the radar wave in the maritime boundary layer of the atmosphere is
changed by external influences, subrefraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent upwards away
from the earth's surface, and superrefraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent down towards the
earth's surface.
In the case of superrefraction, false echoes of targets outside the set range of measurement can occur:
the echo of a transmitted pulse is not received within the set range but during the next transmit cycle or
by the one after that. The resulting ghost echoes can occur at any position. Since the position of ghost
echoes depends on the pulse repetition frequency, ghost echoes can be recognised as such by switching
over the pulse length or the range on the master radar.
☞ Every pulse length has a particular pulse repetition frequency assigned to it; therefore, when the
pulse length or range is changed, the repetition frequency changes too (see Section 19.6).
19.4 Radar Setting for the Display of Racon Codes
The code of Racons consists of a radially arranged dash-dot code which begins in the radar video a short
distance behind the beacon position. By means of different codes described in the Lists of Lights, the
approach points equipped with Racons can be clearly identified.
Most Racons transmit in the X-Band, but there are some Racons installed which transmit in the S-Band.
The majority of Racons change their transmission frequency slowly throughout the entire frequency band,
and so they are not received in every revolution of the antenna.
For the setting of the radar, the same basic principles are applicable as for SART detection (see page
162 Radar Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only))
Regarding Clean Sweep function see warning on page 71.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 161

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
19.5 Radar Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only) Operating Instructions
19.5 Radar Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only)
The information needed for reliable detection of SART's is described in IMO Circular 161. The content of
that paper is reproduced on the following pages.
ANNEX
OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION
WARNING: A SART will only respond to an X-Band (3 cm) radar. It will not be seen on
an S-Band (10 cm) radar.
Introduction
l. A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 n.miles. Each radar pulse received causes it to
transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band.
When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 μsec) through the band before beginning a
relatively slow sweep (7.5 μsec) through the band back to the starting frequency. This
process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the
SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of
the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12
slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally
spaced by about 0.64 n.miles will be shown.
2. When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 n.mile, the radar display may show
also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses,
which also are equally spaced by 0.64 n.miles, will be interspersed with the original line
of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Radar Range Scale
3. When looking for a SART it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 n.mile range scale.
This is because the total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may
extend approximately 9.5 n.miles beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to
see a number of response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses.
SART Range Errors
4. When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART
is at a range greater than about 1 n.mile), the position at which the first dot is displayed
may be as much as 0.64 n.mile beyond the true position of the SART. When the range
closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than
150 metres beyond the true position.
Radar Bandwidth
5. This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the
range scale and the associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with
long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on
short ranges.
6. A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it
is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART. The
Radar Operating Manual should be consulted about the particular radar parameters and
bandwidth selection.
Note about item 6: The bandwidth of the radar is not less than 5 MHz. Therefore, the setting described here is not necessary
162 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.5 Radar Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only)
Radar Side Lobes
7. As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART
responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the
anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as
they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART
is near to own ship.
Detuning the Radar
8. To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned
to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response. Radars with automatic
frequency control may not permit manual detune of the equipment. Care should be taken
in operating the radar in the detuned condition as other wanted navigational and anti-colli-
sion information may be removed. The tuning should be returned to normal operation as
soon as possible.
Gain
9. For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection
should be used i.e., with a light background noise speckle visible.
Anti-Clutter Sea Control
10. For optimum range SART detection this control should be set to the minimum. Care
should be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in
clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be detectable, irrespec-
tive of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case, the position of the SART may
be estimated by measuring 9.5 n.miles from the furthest dot back towards own ship.
11. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities. Because the way
in which the automatic sea control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to
another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared
with manual control.
Anti-Clutter Rain Control
12. This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-
clutter rain circuitry. Note that Racon responses, which are often in the form of a long
flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
13. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities. Because the way
in which the automatic rain control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to
another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can then be compared
with manual control.
Note:
The automatic rain and sea clutter controls may be combined in a single ’auto-clutter’
control, in which case the operator is advised to use the manual controls initially until the
SART has been detected, before assessing the effect of auto.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 163

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
19.6 Transmission formats Operating Instructions
19.6 Transmission formats
To optimise detection performance for the different weather conditions, the radar provides different pulse
lenghts and repetition rates. For HSC also a doubled antenna speed is possible if the appropriate
antenna gearbox is installed.
The pulse repetition rates in relation to the range and the pulse length are shown in the following table:
Scanner rotation frequency 23/28 rpm

Range (NM) 1) 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96
Short pulse 1.00 2)
0.08 0.15 0.30 0.50 (
Pulse length (µs) 3)
0.90
PRF (Hz) 2000 1000 500
Long pulse 1.00 2)
0.15 0.30 0.50 3)
Pulse length (µs) 0.90
PRF (Hz) 1000 500
1)
All values of the 0.25 NM range are also valid for the 250 m/500 m ranges
2)
12.5 kW X-Band Transceiver
3)
25 kW X-Band and 30 kW S-Band Transceiver
Scanner rotation frequency 46/56 rpm (HSC radar only)

1)
Range (NM) 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96
Short pulse 0.08 0.15 0.30 0.50
Pulse length (µs)
PRF (Hz) 2000 1000
Long pulse 0.15 0.30 0.50
Pulse length (µs)
PRF (Hz) 1000
1) All values of the 0.25 NM range are also valid for the 250 m / 500 m ranges
164 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.7 Sector Blanking
19.7 Sector Blanking
If the radar transmission is suppressed in particular sectors (because parts of own ship's superstructure
do not allow the radar to function in these directions), these sectors are indicated on the PPI near the
compass scale.
Display of Sector Blanking (Example):
Blanking sector
The start and stop angle of the blanking sector can be set on service level.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 165

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
19.8 Basics of the Evaluation of Radar Video in SAM RADAR1100 Series Operating Instructions
19.8 Basics of the Evaluation of Radar Video in SAM RADAR1100 Series
Generally, the echo data received by the transceiver can be amplified, attenuated or filtered in order to
enhance the display of desired data like targets. The main intention of the signal processing is the clear
and unmistakeable display of radar targets and the suppression of unwanted echoes like sea clutter, rain
clutter or interferences.
Amplification, attenuation or filtering is done in several ways, with continuosly or digitally working filters.
(Some can be set from 0% to 100%, others can only be switched on or off).
Further on, echo data with the same azimuth delivered from one or more radar pulses („sweep-to-sweep-
data“) can be processed or data from one or more antenna turnarounds („scan-to-scan-data“) can be
evaluated.
The amplitudes of echoes can be evaluated in order to determine whether the echoes are targets or
noise, or the correlation of sweep-to-sweep or scan-to-scan data can be used to enhance the radar
picture:
Processing
Amplitude Treatment
Amplification
Attenuation
Correlative Treatment
Raw Radar Data Sweep-to-sweep Filtered Radar Data
Scan-to-scan
Amplitudes are influenced for example by the GAIN and SEA settings, correlation is done amongst others
by the CLEAN SWEEP functions.
In the following, the different filters, their basic techniques and advantages or limitations are described in
the sequence they appear on the screen.
166 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.8 Basics of the Evaluation of Radar Video in SAM RADAR1100 Series
SHORT PULSE/LONG PULSE is available for any range of the radar. The internal pulse length changes
with respect to the selected range automatically. For detailed information on the pulse lengths for any
range, please refer to the table in chapter 19.6 of the Operating Instructions.
The default setting for the pulse length should be SHORT PULSE (SP). A longer pulse has a higher
energy, but not a higher amplitude. Thus, it delivers stronger echoes. It is allowed to switch between the
two pulse lenghts at any time.
If target enhancement or any other filtering methods are active, the stronger echoes are processed by
the filters and are able to improve a weak radar picture.
The TUNE function can be set manually or automatically. TUNE influences the center frequency of the
entire radar echo evaluation process. For the adaption of TUNE, no radar echoes are needed and inter-
ference from other radar devices is suppressed so that automatic tuning (AFC) has the best results and
should be used as default. An optimum tuning is not only important for a clear visual display of the targets
on the video but is also a necessary prerequisite for the ARPA functions.
GAIN setting influences the amplitudes of all echoes and works like an amplifier that makes it possible
to enhance all echoes and noise in the same way in order to get a better picture. But, as said before,
also the noise will be amplified and can disturb the clear display of targets. GAIN should in any case be
set in such a way that slight noise is always visible.
RAIN can be set to manual or automatic mode. In manual mode, a differential filter is used to reduce the
influences of reflections of the rainfall, snow or hail. With an optimal setting of RAIN only the boundary
of the rainy area facing towards the transceiver is displayed and echoes within or behind the rainy area
will be displayed if their echo is still strong enough after having been filtered. Weak echoes will not be
displayed if their echo is too small after the signal has been processed by the filter. Manual RAIN should
be set in such a way that targets can still be observed sufficiently.
In automatic mode, a correlative signal processing takes place and filters out the noise of the rainfall.
Echoes which are strong enough will be displayed, others may disappear.
WARNING:
In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if the setting is correct,
radar targets which only produce weak reflections - especially targets situated behind a
strong rain front - will remain undetected. Such targets can appear suddenly when leaving the
rainy area.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 167

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
SEA can be set to manual or automatic mode. In manual mode, its setting influences the amplitudes of
the radar echoes in such a way that it attenuates echoes close to the antenna very much and that it atten-
uates echoes which are more distant to it only very little. Due to the fact that the distance of a target is
represented by the time its echo needs to return to the antenna, this is called „sensitivity-time-control“
(STC). Nevertheless, echoes which are as strong as the unwanted reflections of the sea may be
suppressed and not visible, or they may appear and disappear, depending on how strong the
surrounding unwanted reflections are.
In automatic mode, a fixed, approved value for the SEA filter is set. Advantages or limitations to the effect
are the same as in manual mode.
WARNING:
In the case that anticlutter sea value is set too large, weak targets can be lost, especially at
close range. If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only produce
weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is correct.
Simultaneous operation of RAIN and SEA
WARNING:
In case that RAIN and SEA are operated simultaneously, especially in very rough weather
conditions, the detection of radar targets may fail even if all settings are correct, because the
sum of clutter (reflections of sea and rain) is as high as or even higher than the reflection of
targets.
CLEAN SWEEP combines an adaptive STC, an additional correlative filter and a so-called „target
enhancement“ in four selectable steps.
Definitions:
Adaptive STC is a second STC that is derived from the medium value of the echoes of the last sweeps.
It is added to the manual STC and is able to suppress clutter.
The correlative filter works in scan to scan mode or over several scans respectively with its parameters
relative to the selected range. In large ranges, the correlation filter will need several scans until an effect
to the picture is visible, in smaller ranges the effect of the filter is faster. It is also able to suppress noise.
Target enhancement is used to display even very small or weak targets. For example, if an echo is this
small that it only lights up one pixel of the screen, it could be overseen or regarded as noise or clutter.
Target enhancement makes it a little bigger, so that is is better to discover among the more dynamic
clutter or noise. With this enhanced target, the correlation filter can work much more precisely.
WARNING:
When the Clean Sweep function is running, the scan-to-scan correlation might have the result
that small, fast-moving targets or Racon codes are displayed with reduced intensity or might
be suppressed.
168 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 19.8 Basics of the Evaluation of Radar Video in SAM RADAR1100 Series
In order to get information of when to use which of the four levelsof the Clean Sweep function, please
refer to the user manual chapter 4.2
In the table below the settings of the respective filters are described:(
Clean OFF LOW MEDIUM HIGH

Sweep
Adaptive no no yes, but small yes, medium

STC value
Correlation no yes, with short yes, longer yes, longer

time-constant time-constant time-constant
than „LOW“ than „MEDIUM“
Target very little, small little medium high

enhance- targets just visi-
ment ble
Table 19-1 Qualitative description of Clean Sweep levels
INTERFERENCE REJECTION is a means to suppress interferences caused by other radars working on

the same frequency. For example, if two radars of the same kind operate very close to each other and
the PRF and signal frequency are similar or equal, the radars will influence each other with their pulses
or echoes. Circles or coils will appear on the PPI. With INTERFERENCE REJECTION on, most of those
effects will be eliminated by a filter that is able to detect those special signals. Targets will not be
suppressed. See also page160 Disturbances Caused by Other Radars.
VIDEO EMPHASIS can be used to increase the detection of targets of the radar. Very strong echoes will
be shown in orange colour. It can help to decide whether an echo is one or two combined objects. For
example, without VE the echo is only a large yellow spot, with VE switched on it is visible that the yellow
spot contains 2 smaller orange dots, it can be decided that there is a structure in the yellow spot or that
there are two echoes very close to each other. The display of targets on the PPI will be improved, targets
will not get lost if VE is switched off. Also structures in land areas or in rainclouds or seaclutter can be
made more visible by the VE function, for instance a light house on a land area or buoys with only a short
distance to the land, whose echoes would normally melt into the ones of the land.
asdadasfdasf
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 169

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
170 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e02.fm / 22.07.09
Voyage Data Recorder (VDR)
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 171

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
172 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 20 Voyage Data Recorder VDR DEBEG 4300
20 Voyage Data Recorder VDR DEBEG 4300

◆ Operating actions of the VDR that can be performed at the radar
indicator
The voyage data recorder continuously records important nautical, technical and safety-related informa-
tion. Because it does this completely automatically, no operating actions are normally needed.
☞ Details on the function and operating of the VDR are given in the Operating Instructions of the VDR.
In two special cases, operating is possible at the radar indicator. This is done in the VDR menu: Open
the VDR menu by clicking on the MENU button and then the VDR button.
Incident Backup
In the VDR, the data recording is performed on several storage media in parallel:
- In the Final Recording Medium, certain data are stored for 12 hours.
- On the removable hard disk, all data are stored for 24 hours.
- On the hard disk drive of the Data Concentrator, all data are stored for 12 hours.
These data are overwritten continuously, so that only the data recorded last are available for evaluation
in each case.
With the function “Incident Backup”, a copy of the data stored on the hard disk drive for the last 12 hours
can be saved there permanently. For evaluation of the backup data, see the Operating Instructions of
the VDR.
Initiating an incident backup: Press the INCIDENT BACKUP DO
button and give the appropriate answer to the safeguard question INCIDENT BACKUP ...
which then appears.
After a short while, the alarm VDR BACKUP IS RUNNING indicates that the backup is being made. The
backup will take less than 5 minutes under normal conditions. During this time, the INCIDENT BACKUP
button is insensitive to operation. Both actions also occur when the backup is initiated by the corre-
sponding key of the Data Concentrator; see the Operating Instructions of the VDR.
The data saved through the incident backup are only overwritten when another backup is performed.
Restart of the VDR

Through the restart, the processor of the VDR is reinitialized. A restart should only be performed if the
alarm VDR INTEGRITY CHECK FAILED has appeared.
Performing a restart: Press the RESTART button and give the
DO
appropriate answer to the safeguard question which then appears. RESTART ...
☞ If the data recording process is still active despite the error
which has occurred, it is briefly interrupted by a restart. An
incident backup which is running at that moment will be
aborted by a restart.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 173

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
20 Voyage Data Recorder VDR DEBEG 4300 RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
NAVTEX
174 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 21 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)
Operating Instructions 21.1 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly
21 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)

◆ The most important characteristics of the NAVTEX system
◆ Displaying and managing received NAVTEX messages
21.1 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly
The NAVTEX receiver is a Narrow Band Direct Printing (NBDP) device operating on the frequency 518
kHz (some equipment can also operate on 490 and 4209.5 kHz), and is a vital part of the Global Maritime
Distress and Safety System (GMDSS).
It automatically receives Maritime Safety Information such as Radio Navigational Warnings, Storm/Gale
Warnings, Meteorological Forecasts, Piracy Warnings, Distress Alerts, etc. (full details of the system can
be found in IMO Publication IMO-951E - The NAVTEX Manual). Each message begins with a start of
message function (ZCZC) followed by a space then four B characters. The first, (B1), identifies the station
being received, the second, (B2), identifies the subject i.e. Navigational Warning, Met Forecasts, etc., and
the third and fourth, (B3 + B4), form the consecutive number of the message from that station. This is
followed by the text of the message and ends with an end of message function (NNNN).The NAVTEX
system broadcasts COASTAL WARNINGS that cover the area from the Fairway Buoy out to about 250
nautical miles from the transmitter; the transmissions from some transmitters can be received out to 400
nautical miles and even further in unusual propagational conditions.
21.2 NAVTEX on Radar
Modern NAVTEX receivers include an INS port 1) which is programmed to transfer the received message
and its alarm messages to any external system. The Radar Series 1100 can be connected to the
NAVTEX INS port whereby these text messages and alarms can be made available on the radar system
and any connected CHARTPILOT.
For identification of the received messages the above mentioned B-characters are combined to a
message identifier (ID) shown in the list of NAVTEX messages in the multidisplay.
To open this list, select MENU, NAVTEX (See menu on next page).
☞ The NAVTEX window is opened automatically when the NEW MESSAGE warning is acknowledged.
On the Chartpilot you can take over one or more geographical position data, which are thereafter shown
as points, lines or areas in the chart.
☞ These geographical NAVTEX objects are only available on the CHARTPILOT which was used to
create them. That means, that the objects are not distributed between the CHARTPILOTs or to radar indi-
cators.
1) Technically, the INS port is a serial interface according to IEC 61162.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 175

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
21 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
21.3 Displaying received NAVTEX messages Operating Instructions
21.3 Displaying received NAVTEX messages
New NAVTEX Message

When the NAVTEX electronics unit receives a new 1.DO
MENU
message, the Alarm NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE appears
only if the button NAVTEX is activated (green). To acti- 2.DO NAVTEX
vate this alarm function, click on the buttons MENU,
NAVTEX
NAVTEX and NAVTEX.
MESSAGES
Even when the NAVTEX alarms are switched off,
incoming messages are stored in the radar and can be 3.DO READ... NEWEST...
called up. 1)
Displaying Incoming MESSAGES

Scroll bar
Up to 200 messages that have arrived during the last 60
NAVTEX MESSAGES
hours can be displayed at any time:
ID NEW DATE
1. Click on the buttons MENU, NAVTEX and READ,
LE85 * 09:50 14.04.08
one after the other. 4.DO GA20 * 09:48 14.04.08
In the NAVTEX MESSAGES list which then opens up
in the Multidisplay, all messages that have arrived
last are listed:
ID: Number of the message from which the
5.DO SHOW PRINT CLOSE
message came.
NEW: Messages that have not yet been read
are provided with an asterisk *.1)
DATE: The time and date of reception.
NAVTEX MESSAGES
2. With Print all messages can be printed out on the
printer connected to one of the CHARTPILOTS. ID GA20
3. Mark the desired message by clicking. WZ 992

RIGMOVE. NORTH SEA. CAPTAIN FIELD.
4. With SHOW, the NAVTEX MESSAGE Dialog is STENA
opened, and the marked message is displayed: SPEY AT 58-18.1N 001-42.4W.
CANCEL THIS MESSAGE 150638 UTC AUG
06.
Below the identification data of the station, the
received text message is listed in the frame. 1.DO NNNN
STORED (CER=00%)
With CLOSE, the Dialog is closed.
LIST PRINT CLOSE
With LIST, the NAVTEX MESSAGES list is called up
again.
5. With PRINT the contents of a message can be
printed out on the printer connected to one of the If there is a printer connected (via
a connected CHARTPILOT), the
CHARTPILOTS. shown message in the window can
☞ For details about the NAVTEX alarms refer to chapter be printed out.
Alarms
1) In case the NAVTEX Alarms are switched off, new incoming messages are stored, but no longer marked as NEW. If messages are to be
unmarked, (the asterisk * is to be deleted), switch off the NAVTEX Alarms button; this will also cancel the NEW MESSAGE alarm and
remove it from the alarm list.
176 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e08.fm / 22.07.09
Alarms
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 177

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
178 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 22 Alarm Management
22 Alarm Management

◆ Display of alarms, warnings and indications
◆ Switching the acoustic signal off and acknowledgement of
alarms
◆ Setting the sounding of the acoustic signal
◆ Switching the alarm list on/off
◆ System fault list
◆ Monitoring of the Computer
◆ Triggering the watch alarm system
If the radar wants to draw the operator's attention to a situation which might require his intervention, it
generates an alarm, warning or indication. This alarm, warning or indication is displayed in the alarm
list which opens automatically in the Multidisplay. As soon as a new entry in the list occurs, the horn
symbol becomes coloured and the lamp above the ACK ALARM key lights up. The newest entry will be
at the top of the alarm list, the oldest will be at the end of this list. Most of the alarms and many warnings
are supplemented by an acoustic signal, see Section 23. For warnings, the acoustic signal can be
switched off.
Scroll bar
ALARM LIST
Symbol red, flashing: Alarm not acknowledged GYRO FAULT
Symbol red, not flashing: Alarm acknowledged SPEED TIMEOUT
Symbol yellow, flashing: Warning not acknowledged AIS NO VALID HEADING
Symbol yellow, not flashing: Warning, acknowledged LOST TARGET (1)
SYSTEM FAULT
No symbol: Indication PLANNING SYSTEM OFFLINE
ACK CLOSE
If the list contains more entries than can be simultaneously displayed, it can be scrolled by clicking below or above the scroll bar.
Alternatively, click on the scroll bar and scroll with the trackball.
Priority levels of the alarm system:
An alarm is an audible and visible signal that indicates a condition requiring immediate
Alarm attention and action by the operator to maintain the safe navigation of the ship.
A warning is announced visually with optional audible signal for precautionary reasons to
Warning make the operator aware of changed conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but
may become so if no action is taken.
An indication is a message in the alarm list which informs about a condition out of the ordi-
Indication nary consideration of the situation or of given information.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 179

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
22 Alarm Management RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
Behaviour when an Alarm, Warning or Indication occurs

1. Switch off the acoustic signal (if there is one) as follows:
In the alarm list, click on the ACK (= acknowledge) button
or on the coloured horn symbol or press the ACK ALARM
DO or DO or
key. As a result, the acoustic signal is switched off on the
radar indicator that is being operated. ACK
ACK ALARM
2. Immediately obtain information about the causes of the
alarm or warning, about the system state and about
possible system reactions, and - if necessary - immedi-
ately perform all necessary actions for the avoidance
of possible danger.
3. Removing the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can
be removed, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also Section 23.
Warnings and indications disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement is then unnec-
essary. Alarms must be acknowledged in any case.
4. The alarms and many warnings must be acknowledged
if the situation allows or requires such acknowledge- DO
ACK
ment: or
LOST TARGET (1)
MORE
In the alarm list, make sure the appropriate entry is high- VDR OFFLINE
lighted and
- press the ACK button or
- click on the coloured horn signal or ACK
- press the ACK ALARM key or VDR OFFLINE
- press the MORE button.
As a result, the entry which is marked in colour is usually

acknowledged. If the reason for the alarm or warning stays present, the entry remains in the list,
otherwise it is removed.
Alarms or warnings which have also been distributed to other items of equipment within the system
are acknowledged there too. If some other entry is marked, the alarm or warning which is to be
acknowledged must be marked beforehand by clicking 1).
If alarms or warnings are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the
system deviates from the behaviour described above, e.g.
- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or
- if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or
- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist,
this situation is mentioned in Section 23. In all cases, this second pressing of the ACK button,
of the coloured horn symbol or of the ACK ALARM key switches off the acoustic alarm on all
devices that have been activated by the alarm.
1) If the display of the alarm list has been switched off although an alarm or warning has not been acknowledged, that entry is automatically
marked as soon as the alarm list is opened again. After having opened the alarm list it may be necessary to mark the most recent entry
by clicking before acknowledgement
180 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 22 Alarm Management
Generally Switching On and Off the Acoustic Signal for Particular Warnings
For the warnings marked with the symbol in Section 23, it
is possible to specify whether or not there should be an 2.DO MENU
ALARMS
acoustic signal when they occur. This setting applies jointly to
all warnings marked in this way. 3.DO
BUZZER
The switch-over is triggered by clicking on the BUZZER button
in the ALARMS menu. 1)
☞ When the buzzer is in switched off state for warnings, the
horn symbol has a cross superimposed on it.
Caution
Switching off the alarm sound is not advisable when a radar indicator is used for any activated monitoring
function (ARPA-, AIS-Targets or track monitoring) and the operator is not continuously observing the
display of the indicator.
Switching O ff the Display of the Alarm List

When the last remaining entry shown in the list is removed, the display of the alarm list is switched off
automatically. The horn symbol appears on a grey background and the lamp above the ACK ALARM
key is not alight, indicating that there are no entries in the alarm list.
The display of the alarm list can be switched off even when there are one or more entries. This is done
by clicking on the HIDE button in the alarm list. The horn symbol meanwhile continues to be coloured
and the lamp above the ACK ALARM key continues to be alight. This indicates that there is at least one
entry in the list.
☞ Even if the display of the alarm list has been switched off with the HIDE button, the alarm list opens
automatically as soon as another alarm, warning or indication occurs.
Switching O n the Display of the Alarm List

If there is an entry in the alarm list, the display of the alarm list can be switched on at any time clicking
on the horn symbol or by pressing the ACK ALARM key.
Listing the Currently Existing System Faults

System faults that have occurred during run-time of the system generate the warning SYSTEM FAULT
and can be listed as follows:
Click on the buttons MENU, UTILITIES and SYSTEM FAULT
LIST one after the other to open the SYSTEM FAULT LIST. 2.DO MENU
UTILITIES
All system faults that exist at the time are listed. New faults are
3.DO
added to the list automatically. System Faults which do not exist SYSTEM FAULT LIST...
any more are deleted from the list.
To get more information regarding the error it is possible to set
the cursor on the error. In this case the system opens a "balloon-
window" with additional information like:
1) The BUZZER button available in the menu ALARMS > SETTINGS (see page 128) has the same function.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 181

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
22 Alarm Management RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
Error: Brief description of the fault reason

Device, Subdev: Unit/assembly in which the fault Number of system faults
occurred Scroll bar
Info: Brief description for the reason of the fault
Info SYSTEM FAULT LIST
FAULT INFO ( 04 )
Error code
☞ Acknowledgement of the warning SYSTEM FAULT 02175 checkword error
automatically opens the SYSTEM FAULT LIST. 02281 no trigger
03014 fast gyro timeout
03014 NAV-BUS fast gyro timeout
Balloon-Text
Monitoring of the Computer

If the computer of the display electronics unit fails completely and to avoid a Radar picture freeze, the
PPI is covered by a red square. If this display continues to exist even after the radar system has been
switched off and then switched on again 1), there is a fault which can be corrected by service personnel
only.
Prevention of Triggering of the Watch Alarm

If the installation has been performed appropriately including a connection to the watch alarm system,
any operating action performed on one of the radar indicators will have the same effect as the operating
of a watch alarm key. This means, that the DEAD MAN ALARM - timer will be affected when actions on
the radar indicator are taken.
1) Switching the display electronics unit off and on can be done by operating the power switch of the display electronics unit. This switch is
situated beside the plug-in connection of the mains cable input on the display electronics unit. The alternative is to switch the entire radar
system off and on as per Section 2.1. After switching off, wait for a minimum of 30 seconds before switching on again.
182 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 23 List of Alarms
23 List of Alarms

◆ The meaning of the individual alarms, warnings and indications
◆ Special features in the case of acknowledgement
◆ Possible remedies
☞ This list covers all of the alarms, warnings and indications that
can occur on the radar indicator to provide information for the operator.
The sounding of an acoustic signal is defined by the following symbols:
The acoustic signal is sounded regardless of how the BUZZER function is set in the ALARMS
menu; see page 181.
The acoustic signal is sounded only if the BUZZER function is switched on in the ALARMS
menu.
Whether an acoustic signal is sounded depends on the factors described.
If no symbol is stated, the warning or indication appears without an acoustic signal.
ACQUISITION ZONE OVERFLOW

A target has been acquired automatically in the guard zone. It cannot be tracked, because the
maximum number of targets 1) are already being tracked.
Remedy: Check the acquisition/guard zone; delete targets.
ANCHOR DRAGGING
The ship has moved farther away from the anchor position than is permitted by the length of the
anchor chain.
Special feature: This alarm indication cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the cause of
the indication has ceased to exist or the watch alarm function is switched off.
1) ARPA targets and AIS targets together
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 183

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
23 List of Alarms RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
APPROACHING WAYPOINT
The next wheel-over point will be reached soon. The time which, on occurrence of the alarm,
remains up to the wheel-over point, is entered in the WPT APPROACH field in the TRACK / DEPTH
ALARMS Dialog.
Special feature: The warning is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off in the above-mentioned Dialog. On each of these units, an acknowledgement is
necessary.
BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM

The bridge alarm system has sent a warning message to the radar.
Special features: The message is distributed over the entire system. 1)
The text describing the reason of the warning sent from the bridge alarm system can be displayed
by clicking on the text in the alarm list with the MORE key.
By acknowledgement of the warning on the radar, the bridge alarm system too is acknowledged.
At service level, it is possible to define which of the alert causes reported by the bridge alarm system
also trigger an acoustic signal on the radar, and it is possible to define that this warning can gener-
ally be suppressed by the operator; see page 128.
CHART SERVER OFFLINE

The CHARTPILOT from which the chart data are taken is no longer sending any data. Therefore,
chart data are no longer available.
Remedy: Check the CHARTPILOT or switch to Radar mode.
COG OF RED. POSITION DIFFER

The difference between the heading of the gyro and the COG of the redundant position sensor
exceeds the specified alarm limit 2).
Special features: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one of the system's items
of equipment.
After pressing of the ACK button, the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog appears. There, the monitored
sensors and the comparison sensor for which a monitoring alarm occurs appear in red.
Remedy: Increase the alarm limit, or switch off this monitoring function.
COG OF RED. POSITION LOST

The redundant position sensor is used for the monitoring of the gyro, but no valid COG is received
from it. The set monitoring no longer takes place while the cause of the alarm still exists.
of equipment.
Remedy: Switch off DGPS ONLY, or switch off this monitoring function.
Remark: Usability of DGPS ONLY button can be restricted in the SERVICE menu
1) The announcement of this warning can be switched off in the ALARM SETTINGS menu.
2) Also taking account of the effect of drift at low speed and of the effects of the existing ROT - see page 84.
184 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
COG OF SEL. POSITION DIFFER

The difference between the heading of the gyro and the COG of the selected position sensor
exceeds the specified alarm limit. 2)
of equipment.
Remedy: Increase the alarm limit, or select a different position sensor, or switch off this monitoring
function.
COG OF SEL. POSITION LOST

The selected position sensor is used for the monitoring of the gyro, but no valid COG is received
of equipment.
Remedy: Switch off DGPS ONLY, select a different position sensor, or switch off this monitoring
function.
Remark: Usability of DGPS ONLY button can be restricted in the SERVICE menu
COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED

The actual course is deviating from the set course defined by the System Track by more than the
amount displayed in the COURSE field behind LIMITS in the TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS Dialog.
Special feature: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is switched on in the above-mentioned Dialog. On each of these units, an acknowledgement is
necessary.
Remedy: Increase the course limit (if the nautical situation allows this) or deactivate the track
alarms.
DANGEROUS TARGET (n) (n= number of dangerous targets which are triggering the alarm)
The target situated at the displayed range and bearing has become a dangerous target, because the
CPA and TCPA values have become smaller than the limits that were set for them.
Special feature: For this alarm it is possible to switch off the acoustic signal, but it must be acknowl-
edged in any case before it is deleted from the alarm list.
DANGEROUS TGT ACQ FAILED

For an AIS target not being tracked, the TCPA/CPA values have fallen below the specified limits. It
was impossible to acquire the target because the maximum possible number of targets are already
being tracked.
Remedy: Delete non-critical tracked AIS targets.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 185

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
DEAD MAN PRE ALARM

The watch alarm system will trigger the watch alarm after a short time if, within that time, the DEAD
MAN PRE ALARM is not acknowledged and no watch alarm key is pressed.
Special feature: Acknowledgement with any key on any radar indicator and with the Acknowledge
button in the alarm list on the CHARTPILOT. Following the acknowledgement, the the external dead
man alarm of the watch alarm system will be retriggered (i.e. resetted).
DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED

The water depth below the transducer measured by the navigation echosounder is less than the
ECHOSOUNDER DEPTH LIMIT displayed in the TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS Dialog.
necessary.
GYRO FAULT
The compass system is switched off, or has failed, or is reporting incorrect data.
- or -
The gyro interface connected to the radar system has failed. Acknowledgement is possible on any
indicator.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the GYRO FAULT alarm occurs, it is no longer possible to switch to Chart mode. If the indicator
is in Chart mode, it is automatically switched over to the Radar mode and the Head-Up display
mode. All display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are
no longer shown or are inactive. If the cause of the alarm is not corrected within 30 seconds, the
tracked targets are deleted.
Remedy: Check the compass system, the signal transmission and the gyro interface.
GYRO VALID
The compass is again sending valid data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If a compass is installed which sends heading changes only, the heading transfer must be synchro-
nised again. For this purpose, as a result of final acknowledgement of the alarm, the virtual keyboard
appears automatically, showing the heading that was sent last; for further procedure, see page 76.
INTERSWITCH OFFLINE
The computer of the display electronics has no contact with the Processor Controlled
Interswitch (PCI).
- or -
The Interswitch is reporting a malfunction.
Each indicator of the radar system should now be connected to its default transceiver.
Remedy: Check the PCI electronics unit (GE3041).
186 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
LATITUDE EXCEEDED
The 85th parallel of latitude has been exceeded. The radar is no longer processing position data.
Any functions which require position data, e.g. Track mode, may no longer be used here.
Special feature: The indication is distributed over the entire system.
LOG STATUS CHANGED 1)

The log selected as the speed sensor has changed its status, e.g. from Bottom Track to Water
Track. It is sending valid data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on
any indicator.
Remedy: Check what change of status is involved; if necessary, select some other speed sensor.
LOST TARGET (n) (n=target ID) 2)

The tracked target situated at the displayed range and bearing has got lost.
Special feature: For this warning it is possible to switch off the acoustic signal.
LOW POSITION QUALITY 3)

The selected position sensor has reported a greater position-deviation than is usual for this type of
sensor.
Special feature: The warning is distributed over the entire system.
Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor.
MAGNETIC HEADING DIFFER

The difference between the heading of the gyro and the heading of the magnetic compass exceeds
the specified alarm limit.
of equipment.
Remedy: Increase the alarm limit, or switch off this monitoring function.
MAGNETIC HEADING LOST

No valid heading signal is received from the magnetic compass that is specified as the comparison
sensor for the monitoring of the gyro. The set monitoring no longer takes place while the cause of
the warning still exists.
of equipment.
Remedy: Switch off this monitoring function.
1)
Can be switched on or off by menu ALARM SETTINGS
2) For AIS targets the LOST TARGET warning can be disabled in the ALARM SETTINGS menu.
3) This alarm can only appear if activated on service level; it is required for ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 187

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
MAGNETRON FAULT
The selected transceiver is reporting magnetron overcurrent.
Special feature: Acknowledgement is performed by switching the radar over to stand-by.
Remedy: Switch the transceiver over to stand-by, and then switch it back to radar operation. If the
warning occurs repeatedly, request service.
MAP FILE SYSTEM OVERFLOW

The file system provided for map data is full. An attempt to store a map has failed.
Remedy: Delete map data no longer used.
NO ANTENNA AZIMUTH
The azimuth angle information of the antenna is missing.
Remedy:
- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-breaker.
- If the antenna is rotating: request service.
NO HEADMARKER
The antenna's headmarker signal is missing.
Remedy:
- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-breaker.
- If the antenna is rotating: request service.
NO RADAR VIDEO
The system is in a faulty condition, such that the radar video cannot be generated.
Remedy:
- Check the radar transceiver
- Check the antenna
- Request service.
NO TRIGGER
The radar transmission trigger is missing.
If this indication appears at all radar indicators of the system, it indicates a basic failure of the Inter-
switch (for further details on the Interswitch, see page 14.
Remedy:
- Check the radar transceiver.
- In the case of the Interswitch failure, see footnote 1).
1)
The radar function can be restored on those radar indicators to which the radar transceivers/antennas are assigned by default in the system
configuration; this is done by briefly disconnecting the Interswitch from the ship’s mains. However, this does not reinstate the Interswitch
function. Repair by a SAM-authorized service station must be carried out as soon as possible. If separation from the ship’s mains is not
easily done, the circuit can be broken be removing and replacing the fuse located in the Interswitch.
DANGER: Dangerous voltage
The Interswitch must be opened only by a qualified, trained person.
☞ The Interswitch is an electronic assembly that is located (alone or together with another electronic assembly) in a wall-mounted elec-
tronics cabinet with a size of 45 x 45 cm. The type GE3041 is indicated on the nameplate of the electronics cabinet.
188 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY or ON TRACK

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a vector chart object being
monitored, i.e. a potentially dangerous chart object, is situated a short distance ahead of own ship,
or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently
relevant part of the System Track. Details are displayed on the CHARTPILOT. For explanations, see
the Operating Instructions of the CHARTPILOT. 1)
Special features:
In the Chart Alarm List of the CHARTPILOT, the object class of the detected object is displayed,
together with any other information available for this in the chart and an entry providing information
about the monitored area with which the object was detected:
Inside or crossing: Detected via the currently existing position of own ship (own ship's contour)
On Track: Detected via the currently relevant part of the System Track
Ahead: Detected via the future position of own ship (guard sector)
The CHARTPILOT distributes this warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs.
OPERATING UNIT FAILURE

An active keyboard/trackball unit has failed.
Remedy: If installed, reactivate the master keyboard/trackball unit or try to activate another slave
keyboard/trackball unit. Otherwise switch the radar indicator off and on again.
PLANNING SYSTEM OFFLINE

None of the CHARTPILOTs is sending any data to the radar system. Therefore, tracks are no longer
available.
Remedy: Check the CHARTPILOTs.
POSITION INVALID
The selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead
reckoning (i.e. is temporarily switched to Estimated Position).
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on
any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system automatically recommends a substitute sensor and displays
its data in the Multidisplay. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated
as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the position sensor which led to the POSITION INVALID
alarm is sending valid data again, the POSITION VALID warning appears.
POSITION STATUS CHANGED

The selected position sensor has performed an internal status-change (e.g. from DGPS to GPS) or
has changed the reception process (e.g. from DECCA to LORAN).
Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible
on any indicator.
The acoustic signal is not sounded if a change takes place from GPS to DGPS.
The monitoring of the position status can be switched on or off in the ALARM SETTINGS menu.
1)
This alarm should be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT after the nautical situation has been checked there with the aid of the electronic
chart. A balloontext in the radar´s alarm list indicates the number of the CHARTPILOT that has issued the alarm.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 189

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
POSITION TIMEOUT
Data are no longer being received from the selected position sensor. Another position sensor will
have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position
by dead reckoning.
any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system automatically recommends a substitute sensor and displays
its data in the Multidisplay. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated
as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the position sensor which led to the POSITION TIMEOUT
alarm is sending valid data again, the POSITION VALID alarm appears.
POSITION VALID
The position sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is
again sending valid data.
on any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system displays the data of the sensor which had given the POSI-
TION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm. After checking the new sensor-data displayed in the
sensor selection menu, either confirm this sensor by clicking on the SELECT button or select
another sensor.
RED. POSN QUALITY REDUCED

The comparison sensor used for monitoring of the position data has been exchanged. The new
comparison sensor might have a worse position quality than the comparison sensor that was used
previously. If necessary, the alarm limit must be adapted in the SENSOR MONITORING menu.
of equipment.
REDUNDANT POSITION DIFFER

The difference between the positions of the selected position sensor and of the redundant position
sensor exceeds the specified alarm limit.
of equipment.
After pressing of the ACK button, the SENSOR MONITOR dialog appears. There, the monitored
Remedy: Select a different position sensor, or increase the alarm limit, or switch off this monitoring
function.
REDUNDANT POSITION LOST

No valid position is received from the redundant position sensor. The set monitoring no longer takes
place while the cause of the warning still exists.
of equipment.d
Remedy: Select a different position sensor, or switch off this monitoring function.
190 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
ROT LIMIT EXCEEDED 1)

The rate of turn computed from the change in the received heading signal is greater than is possible
according to the ship dynamics parameterised in the system. From this, it can be concluded that the
compass or the transfer of the compass signal is defective or disturbed.
Special feature: The warning is distributed over the entire system.
Remedy: Check the compass system.
SAFETY CONTOUR NEARBY or ON TRACK

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that the safety contour or some
other area that is not deep enough is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being
touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the
System Track. Details are displayed on the CHARTPILOT. For explanations, see the Operating
Instructions of the CHARTPILOT. 2)
Special features:
In the Chart Alarm List, the object class of the detected object is displayed, together with any other
information available for this in the chart and an entry providing information about the monitored area
with which the object was detected:
The CHARTPILOT distributes this alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs.
SENSOR MASTER CHANGED

This radar has taken over the task of managing the navigation data because the radar which had
previously been performing that task has failed. It must be assumed that data of sensors which are
only connected to the failed indicator are now missing, whereby other alarms or warnings could be
issued additionally.
Special feature: This indication can not be acknowledged; it disappears after some seconds.
SOG OF RED. POSITION DIFFER

The difference between the speed of the selected speed sensor and the SOG of the redundant posi-
tion sensor exceeds the specified alarm limit.
of equipment.
sensors and the comparison sensor for which a monitoring alarm occurs appear in red. To prevent
the alarm from appearing again, as soon as the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog is closed the cause of
the alarm must be eliminated, see Section 5.5.
Remedy: Select a different speed sensor, or increase the alarm limit, or switch off the sensor moni-
toring.
1) This alarm can only appear if activated on service level. It is required for systems on DNV NAUT/AW approved vessels.
2)
This alarm should be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT after the nautical situation has been checked there with the aid of the electronic
chart. A balloontext in the radar´s alarm list indicates the number of the CHARTPILOT that has issued the alarm.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 191

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
SOG OF RED. POSITION LOST

The redundant position sensor is used for the monitoring of the speed, but no valid SOG is received
of equipment.
sensors and the comparison sensor for which a monitoring alarm occurs appear in red. To prevent
the alarm from appearing again, as soon as the SENSOR MONITOR Dialog is closed the cause of
the alarm must be eliminated, see Section 5.5.
Remedy: Switch off DGPS ONLY, or switch off this sensor monitoring function.
Remark: Usability of DGPS ONLY button can be restricted on service level; by default this func-
tion is not available.
SOG OF SEL. POSITION DIFFER

The difference between the speed of the selected speed sensor and the SOG of the selected posi-
tion sensor exceeds the specified alarm limit.
of equipment.dAfter pressing of the ACK button, the SENSOR MONITOR dialog appears. There, the
monitored sensors and the comparison sensor for which a monitoring alarm occurs appear in red.
Remedy: Select a different speed sensor, or select a different position sensor, or increase the alarm
limit, or switch off the sensor monitoring.
SOG OF SEL. POSITION LOST

The selected position sensor is used for the monitoring of the speed, but no valid SOG is received
of equipment.
b) An attempt is made to activate the SPEEDPILOT
192 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
SPEED INVALID
The selected speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to be selected
by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used. Dashes
are shown in the speed display field.
any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system automatically preselects a substitute sensor and shows its
data in the Multidisplay. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated
as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED INVALID alarm is
again sending valid data, the SPEED VALID alarm appears.
SPEED TIMEOUT
Data are no longer being received from the selected speed sensor. Another speed sensor will have
to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being
used.
any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system automatically preselects a substitute sensor and shows its
data in the Multidisplay. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated
as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED TIMEOUT alarm
is again sending valid data, the SPEED VALID alarm appears.
Until valid speed data are received, the alarm is repeated at intervals of one minute.
SPEED VALID
The speed sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again
sending valid data.
on any indicator.
After final acknowledgement, the system displays the data of the sensor which had given the SPEED
INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm. After checking the new sensor data, either confirm this sensor
by clicking on the SELECT button or select some other sensor.
SQUAT ALARM
The ship is sailing with high speed in shallow water (under TRACKPILOT control). The potential
squat effect could negatively influence the steering ability (the course stability) of the ship.
Remedy: Consider changing to manual steering and to reduce the speed until the water depth has
increased again.
SQUAT WARNING
The ship is sailing with relative high speed in decreasing water depth (under TRACKPILOT control).
Observe the steering performance (for example by switching on the TRACKPILOT´s Rudder
Recording window on the CONNING display).
Remedy: Check the TRACKPILOT settings Rudder Economy, Loading and Rudder Limit.
Consider changing to manual steering and to reduce the speed until the water depth has increased
again.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 193

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
SYSTEM FAULT
A system fault is present.
This indication indicates that there is a technical fault which is impairing, or could impair, the func-
tioning of the radar or of the system. If such an indication is occurring frequently or if it persists for
some time, the service organisation should be informed of this.
Special features: This alarm can occur simultaneously on more than one of the system's items of
equipment.
If several of these alarms (with different fault indications) occur simultaneously on an item of equip-
ment, only SYSTEM FAULT is displayed in the alarm list. The other system fault that are may
present can be made visible with the SYSTEM FAULT LIST -see page 181.
☞ With the System Maintenance Manager, lists of the existing system faults and of the system
faults that have occurred in the past can be displayed -see page 212.
☞ The brief explanation (intended for the service personnel) contained in the system fault list can
also be displayed by clicking on the system fault in the alarm list with the MORE key.
☞ In the case of repeated occurrence of the SYSTEM FAULT alarms with a fault code 100xx,
resetting of the VDR program might correct the fault situation, see page 173.
TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) (n=number of targets which are triggering the warning)
A target which is not yet being tracked has been acquired automatically in the acquisition/guard
zone.
TGT ENTERED GUARDZONE (n) (n=number of targets which are triggering the warning)
A target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/guard zone.
TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED

The ship is situated further away from the System Track than the distance displayed in the TRACK
field behind LIMITS in the TRACK / DEPTH ALARMS Dialog.
necessary.
Remedy: Increase the track limit (if the nautical situation allows this) or deactivate the track alarms
- see page 127.
194 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
TRANSCEIVER OFFLINE
The radar indicator electronics has no contact with the selected transceiver.
- or -
The selected transceiver is reporting a malfunction.
USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY or ON TRACK

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a User Chart Object of the
class "own safety line" or "danger highlight", i.e. a potentially dangerous object, is situated a short
distance ahead of own ship, or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead
of own ship on the currently relevant part of the System Track. Details are displayed on the CHART-
PILOT. For explanations, see the Operating Instructions of the CHARTPILOT.2)
Special features:
In the Chart Alarm List, the object class of the detected object is displayed, together with any other
information available for this in the chart and an entry providing information about the monitored area
with which the object was detected:
The CHARTPILOT distributes this warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 195

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
23.1 AIS Alarms Operating Instructions
23.1 AIS Alarms
The following warnings and alarms are only available in the radar system, if a AIS receiver is connected.
AIS GENERAL FAILURE

The AIS stopped the transmission.
Remedy: The AIS system must be exchanged.
AIS INTERROGATION
The AIS has received a long-range interrogation.
Special features: The behaviour depends on the set reply mode - see page 114:
Reply mode Manual: By acknowledgement, the AIS INTERROGATION Dialog appears. There, the
reply is sent by means of the REPLY button or prevented by means of the CLOSE button. The
acoustic signal is sounded.
Reply mode Auto: The reply has been sent; acknowledge in the normal way. The acoustic signal is
not sounded.
If several of these warnings occur simultaneously on a radar indicator, only one of them is displayed
in the alarm list. In this case, after acknowledgement and closing of the AIS INTERROGATION
Dialog, the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears again for the message that has not yet been read.
AIS NEW SAFETY MESSAGE

The AIS has received a safety message.
Special feature: By acknowledgement, the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE Dialog appears with the
message and with the data of the transmitting target.
If several of these alarms occur simultaneously on a radar indicator, only one of them is displayed
in the alarm list. In this case, after acknowledgement and closing of the AIS SAFETY MESSAGE
Dialog, the AIS NEW SAFETY MESSAGE warning appears again for the message that has not yet
been read.
AIS NO CPA ALARM, SOG LOST

Because of missing data, the own speed vector over ground cannot be determined. For all AIS
targets, the collision avoidance computation and therefore the automatic acquisition and the
DANGEROUS TARGET alarm do not take place.
Remedy: Check selected speed sensor, check position sensor. In case that the reference target
speed is in use no calculation can be perform (according to the IMO rules).
AIS NO VALID COG

The AIS system has no valid course over ground information.
Remedy: Check the connected sensor and cabling.
AIS NO VALID HEADING

The AIS system has no valid heading information from the sensor.
Remedy: Check the heading sensor.
196 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 23.1 AIS Alarms
AIS NO VALID POSITION

The AIS system has no valid position information from internal position sensor
Remedy: Check the cabling and the antenna of the internal GPS sensor.
AIS NO VALID ROT

The AIS has no valid rate of turn information from the sensor.
Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling.
AIS NO VALID SOG

The AIS has no valid speed over ground information.
Remedy: Check selected speed sensor.
AIS OFF, POSITION LOST

All information about AIS targets including their displays has been deleted because determination of
own position has been taking place by dead reckoning for the past 10 minutes.
Remedy: Select some other position sensor.
AIS OFFLINE
Remedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltage
supply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains.
AIS OPERATING UNIT OFFLINE

The AIS continues operating.
Remedy: The indicator electronic does not communicate with the AIS electronics unit.
Check the cabling and connection between RADAR and AIS system.
AIS EXTERNAL POSITION LOST

The AIS system does not receive a valid position sensor information and falls back to its internal
position sensor.
Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling.
AIS SAFETY MSG OVERFLOW

Because the safety message that was received last has caused the number of messages to exceed
the number that can be stored.
Remedy: Delete any safety messages that are no longer needed.
AIS SAFETY MSG TX FAILED

The AIS system has recognised that the safety message might not have been transmitted success-
fully.
☞ The cause of this can be that an incorrect MMSI number has been entered and that, as a result,
no confirmation of reception has been received from the addressee.
Special features: If the warning is clicked with MORE before acknowledgement, details are
displayed.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 197

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
23.1 AIS Alarms Operating Instructions
AIS TX MALFUNCTION
The AIS system stopped transmission.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check of the antenna and the antenna cabling (short circuit or
missing contact at the connectors).
AIS VSWR LIMIT EXCEEDED

The AIS system continues operation: The VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) checked by the AIS
is out of range.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check of the AIS UHF antenna, antenna cabling and connectors.
AIS RX CH A MALFUNCTION
The AIS stopped the transmission on the channel A.
AIS RX CH B MALFUNCTION
The AIS stoped the transmission on the channel B.
AIS RX DSC MALFUNCTION

The AIS stopped the transmission on the channel 70.
198 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 23.2 VDR Alarms
23.2 VDR Alarms
The following warnings and alarms are only available in the radar system, if a VDR DEBEG 4300 is
connected.
VDR BACKUP IS RUNNING

In the voyage data recorder, an incident backup is running.
Special features: The indication cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the backup has been
finished.
This indication can occur simultaneously on more than one radar indicator.
VDR FRM FAILURE

The Final Recording Medium is defective, or the data transfer to it is faulty.
Special features: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one radar indicator.
Remedy: Check the VDR.
VDR INTEGRITY CHECK FAILED

A fault or failure has been detected by the BITE (Built-In Test Equipment) of the VDR.
Remedy: Carry out a restart of the VDR; see page 173. Check the VDR.
VDR MAIN POWER FAILURE

The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the VDR is no longer being supplied with power by the
ship's mains. The VDR is supplied with power by the UPS for at least 2 hours.
Remedy: Secure the supply of power from the ship's mains to the UPS.
VDR MICROPHONE FAILED

The microphone test automatically performed by the VDR has shown that at least the recording func-
tion of one of the microphones is faulty.
VDR OFFLINE
The indicator electronics has no contact to the voyage data recorder.
Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elim-
inated.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 199

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
23.3 NAVTEX Alarms Operating Instructions
23.3 NAVTEX Alarms
NAVTEX OFFLINE
The NAVTEX receiver is not online, i.e. the receiver has been switched off, has failed or the communi-
cation to the receiver´s INS-port is interrupted.
The following warnings and alarms are only available in the radar system, if a NAVTEX receiver is
connected and the alarm function is activated on this indicator.
NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE (n)

The NAVTEX has reported a new message which has been stored on the radar indicator. The number
(n) indicates how many new (unread) messages are available. Even if the Navtex alarm function is not
activated on the radar indicator, the new received message will be stored and can be read and printed
by the operator.
Special feature: By acknowledgement, the NAVTEX MESSAGE Dialog appears automatically in the
Multidisplay of the radar indicator.
NAVTEX MSG OVERFLOW

The maximum number of messages that can be stored on the radar indicator has been reached. New
incoming messages will overwrite the oldest messages automatically.
NAVTEX NAV WARNING

The NAVTEX has received a new navigational warning message.
NAVTEX MET WARNING

The NAVTEX has received a new meteorological warning message.
NAVTEX SAR INFO

The NAVTEX has received a new search and rescue information.
NAVTEX RX MALFUNCTION
The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal malfunction.
NAVTEX BIST FAILURE

The receiver has reported a fault in its built-in self test system (BIST).
NAVTEX GENERAL FAILURE

The NAVTEX has stopped receiving and is no longer reporting messages to the radar system..
NAVTEX FAULT (n)

The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal error code (n). Refer to the NAVTEX manual for details.
200 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 24 List of the Alarm Signal Outputs
24 List of the Alarm Signal Outputs
The alarm signals mentioned in the following are provided by the radar system in the form of galvanically
isolated relay contacts. Whether the signals are displayed in a given case, and if so in what form,
depends on the installation and on the type of alarm system involved. Therefore, no statement about this
can be made here.
Radar Alarm
Each radar indicator emits this signal if one of the following alarms is generated 1):
- GYRO FAULT,
- INTERSWITCH OFFLINE,
- MAGNETRON FAULT,
- NO ANTENNA AZIMUTH,
- NO HEADMARKER,
- NO RADAR VIDEO,
- NO TRIGGER,
- PLANNING SYSTEM OFFLINE,
- POSITION INVALID,
- POSITION TIMEOUT,
- SPEED INVALID,
- SPEED TIMEOUT,
- TRANSCEIVER OFFLINE.
If an appropriate setting has been made at service level, the Radar Alarm is also emitted if the SYSTEM
FAULT alarm appears.
The Radar Alarm is also emitted if switch-off of the display electronics unit occurs or if the supply voltage
to the display electronics unit has failed.
Target Alarm
Every radar indicator emits this signal if one of the following alarms is generated 1)
- DANGEROUS TARGET,
- LOST TARGET (n),
- TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n);
- TGT ENTERED GUARDZONE (n) .
1) For the Radar Alarm, the Target Alarm and the Chart Alarm, output of the alarm can be delayed by up to 120 seconds at service level.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 201

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
24 List of the Alarm Signal Outputs RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
Chart Alarm
Every radar indicator emits this signal if one of the following alarms is generated (by the
CHARTPILOT) :
- APPROACHING WAYPOINT,
- COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED,
- DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED,
- OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY or ON TRACK,
- SAFETY CONTOUR NEARBY or ON TRACK,
- TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED,
- USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY or ON TRACK,
Dead Man Alarm Trigger

Every radar indicator emits this signal when any operating action is performed on its keyboard. Therefore,
if the installation has been performed appropriately, there is no need to operate a special watch alarm
key when a radar indicator is being operated.
If a connected CHARTPILOT is configured on service level to reset the watch alarm, also any operation
of the CHARTPILOT is also activating this signal.
202 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e09.fm / 22.07.09
Care and Maintenance
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 203

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
204 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 25 Care and Maintenance Work
Operating Instructions 25.1 Care
25 Care and Maintenance Work

◆ Care of the system's components
◆ Routine maintenance work
25.1 Care
Care of the components of the radar system is limited to occasional cleaning of the screens on the moni-
tors. This should be done with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
25.2 Maintenance Work
Within the radar system there are some components which have, for multiple reasons, a limited lifetime.
Please refer to the table below in order to perform periodic maintenance:
Component What to do Interval

Filter pads in electronics Clean or replace. Quarter-yearly
units
Check if they are running without noise and for
Fans Quarter-yearly
dirt on the propeller blades. Replace or clean.
Check Monthly.
Exchange after 12 months or if
In order to check magnetron, perform the test lifetime has expired.
Magnetron in section 26. Exchange when lifetime has Average working life for
expired or performance test is weak. - X-Band: about 6000...8000 h
- S-Band: about 9000...16000 h
Check visually every time the gear box is Every 12 months or every time
Toothed belts opened and/or the magnetron is exchanged. the magnetron is exchanged.
Cleaning the Filter Pad on the Display Electronics Unit

If conditions are normal, this work should be done quarter-yearly. If the environment is particularly dusty,
it should be done more frequently, and if the air contains very little dust, it can be done less frequently.
1. Taking out the filter pad: It is situated on the top of the display electronics unit, and can be gripped
and pulled out by its front left-hand corner without unscrewing the covering cap.
☞ If the display electronics unit is installed in the console, the hinged cover situated below the
operating unit must first be opened.
2. Cleaning the filter pad: Cleaning can be done by washing in soapy water, or by blowing the dust
out with compressed air, or - depending on the degree of dirtiness - simply by beating the dust out.
☞ If the pad shall be changed: The ordering No. is 2175640.
3. Inserting the filter pad: When inserting the filter pad, which must have been dried (if necessary, by
jolting it thoroughly to get the water out of it), make certain that it is seated properly.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 205

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
25 Care and Maintenance Work RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
25.2 Maintenance Work Operating Instructions
Checking the Fans of the Display Electronics Unit

NOTE:
The electronics units may only be opened by qualified persons.
This work should be done quarter-yearly.

Performing the Check Undo the screws of the casing cover and take the casing cover off. Check that
the casing fan (under the filter pad) and the CPU fan are running and that there are no noises indicating
damaged bearings.
When screwing the casing cover back on, ensure that the grounding cable is plugged in.
Test of the Transmission Power and Receiver Sensitivity of the Radar Transceiver
The test described in Section 26 shall be performed monthly.
Check the workinghours of the magnetron.

The average working life for X-Band is 6000...8000h.
the average working life for S-Band is 9000...16000h.
The conditions of the magnetron can be checked by means of the performance monitor see Section 26.
Magnetrons are ageing even when the radar is not in use or the magnetron is stored. It is advisable not
to keep magnetrons in stock for a longer period of time. Their life is reduced during storage, too.
The workinghours can be checked by opening the Telemonitoring Data in the S y s t e m M a i n t e n a n c e
M a n a g e r see Section 27.
Check of the toothed belts.
The toothed belts can be inspected visually after opening the gear-box. They should be checked for
mechanical damages as fissures and fractures on the surface and for visible parts of the weft, especially
at the edges. If such damages are visible, the belts must be exchanged.
206 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 25 Care and Maintenance Work
Operating Instructions 25.3 Remote Maintenance
25.3 Remote Maintenance
The main subsystems within the NACOS can be accessed remotely for maintenance purposes. Prereq-
uisites are that the infrastructure allows remote access, that means that the interfaces are prepared and
the software version is at least 5.01 for the RADAR/MULTIPILOT/TRACKPILOT system.
Remote Maintenance is limited to the download of software versions, configuration files and error logs of
- Radar 1x00
- Chartradar 1x00
- Multipilot 1x00
- Trackpilot 1x00
- VDR DEBEG 4300
It brings the service organisation of SAM-Electronics into the position to carry out a more effective
service, because detailed knowledge about the cause of the reported problem is possible in advance.
☞Remote Maintenance access does not have any influence on the functionality of the subsys-
tems in question.
Once a remote maintenance request takes place, an informa-
tion window appears as a dialog box.
After positive confirmation the Remote Access is established

and will be indicated by the information EXTERNAL ACCESS
ACTIVE on the indicator that is assigned sensor master.
All other indicators indicate the information EXTERNAL

ACCESS while file transfer takes place.
After successful download of the data (depending on the available bandwidth it may take up to 5 minutes)
and closing of the connection by the remote operator, the information line will automatically disappear.
This indicates that the Remote access has been finished.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 207

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
25 Care and Maintenance Work RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
25.3 Remote Maintenance Operating Instructions
208 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 26 Performance Monitor
26 Performance Monitor

◆ Checking the transmitter performance
◆ Checking the receiver sensitivity
With the performance monitor, the transmitter performance and the receiver sensitivity can be checked.
To check the transmitter performance, the antenna gearbox contains an auxiliary antenna in the radi-
ating region of the main antenna. The signal received by this auxiliary antenna is processed and
produces a "good/bad" display. This check thus covers the entire RF transmitting branch of the trans-
ceiver, including the magnetron (which is subject to natural aging), the waveguide and the antenna.
The receiver sensitivity is checked by inputting a signal directly at the receiver input, which leads to a
"good" display if, and only if, the amplification is adequate.
Performing the Test

IMPORTANT:
During the test, the radar cannot be used for navigation.
1. Perform tuning as described in Section 4.2.
MENU
2. Click on the buttons MENU, UTILITIES and PERFORM- 2.DO UTILITIES
ANCE MONITOR one after the other. After the safety-
related question which then appears has been answered 3.DO PERFORMANCE MONITOR
suitably, the radar is automatically switched to the following
settings:
- RANGE = 24 NM
- RAIN = 0
- SEA = 0
- CLEAN SWP = OFF
- IR = OFF
If the high revolution rate of the antenna is switched on, a switch-over to the normal revolution rate
takes place automatically.
Beside the GAIN field, the coloured symbol PM appears. indicating that the performance monitor is
switched on.
3. Perform tuning and set the gain so that the noise is only just visible and no more.
4. On the PPI, a sector is displayed as the result for the check of the transmitting performance, and a
circle is displayed as the result for the check of the receiving performance.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 209

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
26 Performance Monitor RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
16 NM if the transmitting performance is adequate
4 - 6 NM if the receiving sensitivity is adequate
The desired display produced by the Performance Monitor
Evaluation:
If the sector has a radius of about 16 NM, the transmitting performance is adequate.
☞ The transmitting performance is permitted to drop by 6 dB relative to the nominal performance
and still be regarded as adequate. The sector then still has a radius of approximately 16 NM. If
the transmitting performance drops by more than 6 dB, the sector radius is reduced to 6 NM or
less.
The receiving sensitivity is adequate if the circle has a radius of at least 4 NM.
☞ The receiving sensitivity is permitted to drop by 5 dB relative to the nominal sensitivity and still
be regarded as adequate. The radius of 4 NM corresponds to a reduction of 5 dB.
WARNING:
If these displays do not have the values mentioned, this means that the
performance quality of the radar system is no longer adequate for safe
radar operation. Request service!
☞ Not only the magnetron that is being checked with this test but also the toothed belts of the
antenna gearing are expendable parts. Therefore, if the test shows that the magnetron has
reached the end of its useful life, the toothed belts also must be exchanged during the neces-
sary service work.
5. Switch off the performance monitor by clicking on the symbol PM .
6. Perform tuning as described in Section 4.2.
7. Check the elapsed time of the magnetron as described in chapter 27.1
For a maintenance schedule please refer to the Technical Manual

ED3051G442, Chapter Maintenance
210 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR 27 System Maintenance Manager
27 System Maintenance Manager

◆ Determining the versions of software, hardware and documenta-
tion
◆ Listing the system faults
◆ Copying the data of versions and the system faults to a diskette
◆ Off-line self checks
◆ Checking / correcting the computer time
◆ Copying and saving the map data
◆ The handling of diskettes
◆ Restarting the radar indicator
The System Maintenance Manager is a subroutine which is installed for maintenance purposes but also
provides the following functions for the operator.
IMPORTANT:
The window of the System Maintenance Manager partly covers the PPI.
Therefore, the System Maintenance Manager may be started only if the
radar system is not being used for navigation.
This opens the Selfcheck index This opens the Tools index card; This opens the Telemonitoring Data
card; for illustration, see page 214 for illustration, see page 218 index card; for illustration, see page 212
DO
MENU
UTILITIES
MAINTENANCE
This switches off the System

Maintenance Manager.
Do not use Restarts the radar indicator, see page 222
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 211

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27 System Maintenance Manager RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
27.1 Determining the Versions of Software, Hardware and Documentation Operating Instructions
Switching the System Maintenance Manager On

Click on the buttons MENU, UTILITIES and MAINTENANCE one after the other. After the safety-related
question which then appears has been answered suitably, the window of the System Maintenance
Manager appears.
The window is organised in the form of a card index box. Only the Selfcheck, Telemonitoring Data and
Tools index cards contain operator functions. The superordinate key ASCII Keyboard shall not be used
by the operator.
Switching Off the System Maintenance Manager

In the window of the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Exit button.
27.1 Determining the Versions of Software, Hardware and Documentation
The versions of the unit's software and hardware can be indicated, as well as the appropriate version of
the customer documentation: Click on the index card Telemonitoring Data, and then click on Versions.
The following then appears:
- CHARTRADAR or RADARPILOT: The software version of the unit
- Documentation: The number and revision index of the associated documentation. These data must
be present on the title pages of the documents used.
- IMB Image: Software version of the IMB (the central assembly on which the program is stored).
- AIS: Software version of the AIS electronics unit.
- PCB Versions: The electronics assemblies installed, with their software versions
- Magnetron working hours: displays the operation duration of the magnetron.
☞ These data, together with the system fault lists, can be transferred as a file to diskette - see page
213.
27.2 Listing the System Faults
System faults that have occurred (which generate the alarm indication SYSTEM FAULT) can be listed.
The list can be transferred as a file to diskette, and is then available for further transfer. This function,
which is provided for service use, is also accessible to the operator because, in the event a fault, a
service visit can be better prepared or even omitted if the service station can be informed of the fault
codes beforehand.
Listing the Currently Existing System Faults

Click on the Telemonitoring Data index card, and then click on Faults. All system faults that exist at the
time are listed under Present Faults. New faults are added to the list if and only if the square in the
Faults button is green (can be switched on and off by clicking of the Faults button).
Listing the System Faults that have Occurred

After clicking of the Fault History button, two lists appear additionally:
212 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 27.2 Listing the System Faults
Fault History: Contains all faults that have occurred since switch-on of the indicator, in the sequence in
which they first appeared. Contents:
Date/Time: Time of the most recent occurrence
Count: Number of occurrences since switch-on of the unit
Fault: Fault code
Dev, Subdev: Unit/assembly in which the fault occurred
Info: Brief description of the fault
List of system faults
Listing the system faults

that have occurred
This deletes the
This produces a list of the display of data
system faults that exist
Green: The fault list is With this, the
continually updated fault data and
information
about the
versions are
Display of the versions of software, transferred to
hardware and documentation; see diskette
Section 27.1
System Integrity Faults: If an entire process fails, this event is recorded here. Contents:
Time: The time of the most recent failure,
Count: Number of failures since switch-on of the unit,
Task: The process that has failed.
Transferring the Fault Data and Version Data to Diskette

Put a DOS-formatted 3.5" diskette into the diskette drive 1) and click on Save to Disk.
The ASCII file TMD.txt is then copied onto the diskette. This file contains
- identification data of the ship, and the current date,
- the version data which can be determined according to Section 27.1,
- the Fault History list,
- the System Integrity Faults list.
1) The write protect function must be in the switched-off state, i.e. the bottom left-hand hole must be closed.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 213

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27.3 Off-Line Self check Operating Instructions
27.3 Off-Line Self check
With the self check, important components of the radar system can be checked. The ARPA function test
permits periodical checking of the ARPA's performance features.
Starting the Self check

1. Click on the Selfcheck index card.
2. In the list, click on the desired check.
3. Click on the Start Test button. The window of the System Maintenance Manager disappears, and
the box of the relevant self-test appears.
1.DO
2.DO
Click on the desired self check
3.DO
Start the selected

check function
Ending the Self check

At top right in the boxes of the self-test, there is an button containing a cross. By the clicking of this
button, the test is ended.
Testing the Trackball and the (optional) Keyboard

In the list, select Keyboard. After the start, a schematic picture of the operating elements appears.
If, when the keys in that picture are operated, the corresponding field gives a coloured flash of light, this
means that the key is functioning properly.
If the coordinate values displayed at the trackball symbol change in accordance with the trackball move-
ment, this means that the trackball is functioning properly.
If the boxes situated at the rotary knob symbols fill up in accordance with the operation of the rotary
knobs, this means that the rotary knobs are functioning properly.
214 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 27.3 Off-Line Self check
Testing the Acoustic Alarm

In the list, select Buzzer. After the start, a list of the various acoustic alarm signals appears.
If, after you have clicked on the button that exists there, the relevant acoustic signal is sounded, this
means that the acoustic alarm is OK.
Testing the Map Memory

In the list, select IMB Map Storage Test. After the start, the test result appears under Selfcheck
Messages.
Checking the Image Processing of the Radar Video

In the list, select RSC Test Pictures. After the start, a list of the various test figures that can be displayed
appears. By means of these test figures, you can determine whether the radar scan converter (RSC) is
working properly.
☞ In the case of pictures 1 to 3, only the brilliance adjustment function is acting; in the case of pictures
4 to 6, the adjustment functions for gain and range are acting additionally.
Picture 1
In each row of blue to yellow squares, the
yellow intensity must increase from left to
right.
The squares move slowly downwards.
Picture 2
In the middle square, 16 colours are displayed
cyclically one after another.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 215

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27.3 Off-Line Self check Operating Instructions
Picture 3
Each of the four sectors has eight intensities.
They are moved round in the clockwise direc-
tion.
Picture 4
The illustration shows the test picture in the
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: Normal setting
Picture 5
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: 90%
If the gain is reduced, the intensity of the rings
decreases, beginning with the inner rings of
the sets of six.
216 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 27.3 Off-Line Self check
Picture 6
following case:
- Range: 24 NM
- Gain: Maximum
Each of the broad rings consists of rings
arranged inside each other without gaps. If the
gain is reduced, the intensity of these rings
decreases, beginning with the inner ring.
ARPA Function Test

By means of the ARPA function test, the overall performance of the ARPA can be assessed. This should
be done periodically.
Set range to 6 NM. In the list, select ARPA.
After the start, this picture appears. The indi-
vidual echoes displayed are synthetic targets:
- It must be possible to acquire them
manually.
- When the acquisition / guard zone is
placed over one or more targets, auto-
matic acquisition must take place,
together with the associated symbols and
alarms. The targets must be tracked
automatically.
- All targets travel along with your own
ship. Therefore, their true courses and
true speeds must be the same as your
own ship's course and speed.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 217

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27.4 Checking / Correcting the Computer Time Operating Instructions
27.4 Checking / Correcting the Computer Time
As long as the system is receiving the date and time via a connected sensor (e.g. from a GPS receiver),
these data are displayed in the relevant displays of the system, e.g. in the Quick Info box of the radar
indicator 1). If this external information is missing, the date and time with which the internal clock of the
relevant display electronics unit's computer is running (computer time) are displayed instead.
So that the displayed time does not change if the sensor fails, a check should occasionally be made on
all radar indicators to make certain that the computer times are in agreement with UTC. If necessary, the
computer times must be corrected.
Checking the Computer Time

1. Click on the index card Tools.
2. Click on Date & Time.
3. System time and date are displayed under Set Time and Set Date.
Changing the Computer Time

1. Under Set Time or Set Date, click into the numerical field of the value that is to be changed.
2. Using the small keys in front of the numerical fields, set the values correctly to UTC.
☞ The set values have to be valid when the Apply & Save button will be clicked finally.
3. The set values are taken over by pressing of the Apply & Save button.
4. Restart the radar indicator, see page 222.
1.DO
By clicking, the current

system date and time is
Click on the value copied to the computer
that is to be time
changed
Change the value by

means of these
buttons
2.DO
1) Plus the zone time. The time received is UTC; the computer times too must be UTC.
218 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 27.5 Distribution and Deletion of Map Data; Data Saving
27.5 Distribution and Deletion of Map Data; Data Saving
New or altered map data must be distributed to all radar indicators on which they are to be displayed. If
necessary, map data can also be deleted. It is recommended that the most recent set of data should be
saved on diskette.
☞ The most recent set of data should be available on all radar indicators (unless there are particular
reasons opposing this). One of the advantages of this is that it prevents loss of the most recent data,
which would occur if map data on an indicator containing old data were edited and if the map data
were then distributed.
File Structure of the Map Data

For the division of the map data into individual files, the earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring
3° by 3°. All symbols and lines situated in such an area are grouped within a file.
☞ Lines going beyond one of these boundaries are cut at the boundary during the process of division
into files, and are joined together again when the files are called up for the purpose of display or
processing.
Furthermore, the earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 15° by 15°. All map files belonging
to such an area are grouped within a catalog.
For the designation of the files and catalogs, the south-west corner of the area is used in all cases;
files have the file extension .D03, and catalogs have the extension .D15:
- The file S39E144.D03 contains all map data situated in the area bounded by the 39th and 36th
southern lines of latitude and by the 144th and 147th eastern lines of longitude.
- The catalog N15W075.D15 contains all map files of the data that are situated in the area bounded
by the 15th and 30th northern lines of latitude and by the 75th and 60th western lines of longitude.
☞ Just as a map file and the catalog are automatically created as soon as a symbol or line is edited
for the defined area, so are the file and (if applicable) the catalog deleted again as soon as there
are no longer any symbols and lines (or parts of lines) present in the area defined for the file and
catalog.
Special Features of the Lists of the System Maintenance Manager

The System Maintenance Manager uses a form of list which is
similar to that of other operating systems. Important special
features are:
Catalogs and files of the various levels are contained in one and
the same display.
Catalogs are designated by the symbol or , and files by
the symbol .
A minus sign in the square in front of the catalog symbol shows
that the catalog content is displayed. Clicking on a square with a
plus sign causes display of the catalog content.
☞ At the top of the list, the character "/" stands for the root (the
basic list). Marking of this entry selects the sum of all catalogs and files that are present in the list.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 219

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27.5 Distribution and Deletion of Map Data; Data Saving Operating Instructions
Transferring Map Files to Other Radar Indicators

2. Click on Map Transfer, then on Transmit.
3. Click on the field under Destination. Mark the indicator to which the data are to be transferred, or
All indicators if the data are to be transferred to all installed radar indicators.
☞ The indicator designations listed here are identical to those entered in the header bar of the
System Maintenance Manager. If in doubt, switch on the System Maintenance Manager of the
destination unit, and have a look.
4. In the Files in Source list, mark the catalog or file that is to be transferred. If all files are to be trans-
ferred, mark the list entry at the top, designated by "/". By clicking on the Add >> button, put the
marked files and catalogs into the Files to Transfer list.
5. Repeat procedure 4 for other files/catalogs that are to be transferred.
☞ If too many files/catalogs have been entered by mistake, the content of the Files to Transfer
list can be deleted and procedure 4 can be repeated.
6. When all files/catalogs to be transferred have been entered, start the transfer by clicking on the
Transfer button.
During the transfer, an appropriate message appears below the Files in Source list and the data
currently being transferred are marked in the right-hand list.
Defining the transfer direction:

Transmit pressed: The transfer takes place from the indicator
being operated to the unit entered under Destination.
Receive pressed: The transfer takes place from the unit entered
under Source to the indicator being operated.
These catalogs and files are

present in the indicator These files/cata-
whose data are transferred. logs are trans-
ferred
If there is no CHARTPILOT
connected, the Track Transfer
button, with which the tracks
are transferred between the
radar systems, is situated here
- see page 221
Starts the transfer Transmit pressed: Selection and display of the units to
which the data are to be transferred.
Receive pressed: Selection and display of the unit
from which the data are to be transferred.
220 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
Operating Instructions 27.6 Exchanging Track Files between the Indicators; Data Saving
Transferring Map Files from Another Radar Indicator to the One being Operated
Similar to T r a n s f e r r i n g M a p F i l e s t o O t h e r R a d a r I n d i c a t o r s :
2. Click on Map Transfer, then on Receive.
3. Click on the field under Source. Mark the indicator from which the data are to be fetched.
4. In the Files in Source list, mark the catalog or file that is to be transferred. By clicking on the
Add >> button, put the marked files and catalogs into the Files to Transfer list.
5. Repeat procedure 4 for other files/catalogs that are to be transferred.
6. Start the transfer by clicking on the Transfer button.
Deleting Map Files

Similar to T r a n s f e r r i n g M a p F i l e s t o O t h e r R a d a r I n d i c a t o r s :
2. Click on Map Delete.
3. Click on the field under Source. Mark the indicator (or Diskette for the inserted diskette) on which
the data are to be deleted.
4. In the Files in Source list, mark the catalog or file that is to be deleted. By clicking on the Add >>
button, put the marked files and catalogs into the Files to Delete list.
5. Repeat procedure 4 for other files/catalogs that are to be deleted.
6. Click on the Delete button. After the safeguard question which then appears has been answered
with Yes, all map files entered in the Files in Source list which are contained in the data medium
selected in the Source field are irretrievably deleted.
Data Saving and Data Restoration

Data saving is done in the same way as T r a n s f e r r i n g M a p F i l e s t o O t h e r R a d a r I n d i c a t o r s , except that
a DOS-formatted 3.5" diskette is inserted in the diskette drive 1) and that in procedure 3 Diskette is
selected instead of an indicator.
☞ If a window containing the remark File ... does not fit on disk! opens up, the diskette is full: insert
a new diskette and click on Retry.
Data restoration is done in the same way as T r a n s f e r r i n g M a p F i l e s f r o m A n o t h e r R a d a r I n d i c a t o r t o
t h e O n e b e i n g O p e r a t e d , except that the saving diskette is inserted in the diskette drive and that in proce-
dure 3 Diskette is selected instead of an indicator.
27.6 Exchanging Track Files between the Indicators; Data Saving
If there is no CHARTPILOTconnected to the radar system, the track files too must be exchanged between
the radar indicators, and the process of saving the data of these track files must be performed on the
radar indicator. This is done in almost exactly the same way as the transfer and data-saving of the map
files - see Section 27.5; the only difference is that, instead of Map Transfer, the Track Transfer button
must be selected for this.
1) The write protect function must be in the switched-off state, i.e. the bottom left-hand hole must be closed.
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 221

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
27.7 The Handling of Diskettes Operating Instructions
27.7 The Handling of Diskettes
The most important diskette-handling actions that can be performed on any PC are also possible on the
radar indicator:
1. Click onto the index card Tools.
2. Put the diskette into the diskette drive and click on Diskette.
3. As a result of clicking on Info, the currently valid capacity data of the inserted diskette appear in the
frame 3.5" Diskette after a short waiting time.
As a result of clicking on Erase, all data on the diskette are erased after confirmation via a safeguard
question.
As a result of clicking on Format, the diskette is DOS-formatted after confirmation via a safeguard
question.
27.8 Restarting the Radar Indicator
If a malfunction occurs in the radar system in the modes mentioned, and if this malfunction cannot be
corrected by means of the operating actions described in this document, an attempt can be made to
correct the fault by restarting the radar indicator:
In the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Restart button, and answer Yes to the question which
then appears.
222 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_e10.fm / 22.07.09
RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR Notes
Notes
Space for your notes:
ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07) 223

b_r11_eno.fm / 22.07.09
Notes RADARPILOT / CHARTRADAR
224 ED 3051G252 / 00 (2008-07)

b_r11_eno.fm / 22.07.09

OM Radarpilot, Chartpilot Ver.5.0.x

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OM Radarpilot, Chartpilot Ver.5.0.x

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Item No.: ED 3051G252 Revision: 00 (2008-07) Order No.: 390005593

SAM Electronics GmbH

General Safety Precautions

Particular attention must be paid to the notes and warnings refer-

Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented

DANGER: High frequency radiation

Radius of the Radiation Danger Zone

1) IEC 61162-1 largely corresponds to NMEA 0183.

DANGER: Injury caused by a rotating antenna

When the radar system is switched to "ON", it is possible that, instead

DANGER: Dangerous voltage

Even when the equipment is switched off, there can be a dangerous

Because of the capacitors contained in the units, there can be a

General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 Basic Settings; General Remarks about Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3.5 Range Rings, Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4 Setting the Radar Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

5 Heading, Speed, Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

6 Bearing and Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

7 ARPA and AIS Target Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7.11 ARPA Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8 General Information about AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

9 AIS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

10 AIS Settings and Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

11 AIS Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

12 Alarm Settings for Targets, Track- and Sensor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

13 Trial Manoeuvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

14 Events and Position Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

15 Editing of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

16 Editing the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

17 Displays in the Multidisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

18 Quick Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

19 Evaluation of the Radar Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

20 Voyage Data Recorder VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

21 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

22 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

23 List of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

24 List of the Alarm Signal Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

25 Care and Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

26 Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

27 System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Subjects of this Section:

The radar system can be configured in three main versions:

1.1 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals

1.2 RADARPILOT 1100

1.3 CHARTRADAR 1100

1.4 The Equipment Components

1.5 The Consistent Common Reference System

COG / SOG CON

Parallel index line

Measurement relative to the Conning Position (REF = CON)

Parallel index line

Measurement relative to the Radar antenna (Bow Radar) REF=RADAR

1.6 Scope of Applicability of these Operating Instructions

RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR with Reduced Functionality

1.7 System Structure and Installation

Safeguards in Double- and Multiple-Transceiver Installations

X-Band antenna unit

Example of a single installation with minimum scope

S-Band antenna unit with 14 ft scanner and transceiver